WO2023100014A1 - 表示装置 - Google Patents
表示装置 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023100014A1 WO2023100014A1 PCT/IB2022/061057 IB2022061057W WO2023100014A1 WO 2023100014 A1 WO2023100014 A1 WO 2023100014A1 IB 2022061057 W IB2022061057 W IB 2022061057W WO 2023100014 A1 WO2023100014 A1 WO 2023100014A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- insulating layer
- film
- conductive layer
- conductive
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/131—Interconnections, e.g. wiring lines or terminals
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09F—DISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
- G09F9/00—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
- G09F9/30—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D30/00—Field-effect transistors [FET]
- H10D30/01—Manufacture or treatment
- H10D30/021—Manufacture or treatment of FETs having insulated gates [IGFET]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D30/00—Field-effect transistors [FET]
- H10D30/60—Insulated-gate field-effect transistors [IGFET]
- H10D30/67—Thin-film transistors [TFT]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10D—INORGANIC ELECTRIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
- H10D30/00—Field-effect transistors [FET]
- H10D30/60—Insulated-gate field-effect transistors [IGFET]
- H10D30/67—Thin-film transistors [TFT]
- H10D30/674—Thin-film transistors [TFT] characterised by the active materials
- H10D30/6755—Oxide semiconductors, e.g. zinc oxide, copper aluminium oxide or cadmium stannate
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10F—INORGANIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES SENSITIVE TO INFRARED RADIATION, LIGHT, ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION OF SHORTER WAVELENGTH OR CORPUSCULAR RADIATION
- H10F39/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one element covered by group H10F30/00, e.g. radiation detectors comprising photodiode arrays
- H10F39/10—Integrated devices
- H10F39/12—Image sensors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/121—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays characterised by the geometry or disposition of pixel elements
- H10K59/1213—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays characterised by the geometry or disposition of pixel elements the pixel elements being TFTs
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/122—Pixel-defining structures or layers, e.g. banks
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/123—Connection of the pixel electrodes to the thin film transistors [TFT]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/124—Insulating layers formed between TFT elements and OLED elements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/805—Electrodes
- H10K59/8051—Anodes
- H10K59/80515—Anodes characterised by their shape
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/805—Electrodes
- H10K59/8051—Anodes
- H10K59/80517—Multilayers, e.g. transparent multilayers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/805—Electrodes
- H10K59/8051—Anodes
- H10K59/80518—Reflective anodes, e.g. ITO combined with thick metallic layers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/80—Constructional details
- H10K59/805—Electrodes
- H10K59/8052—Cathodes
Definitions
- One aspect of the present invention relates to a display device, a display module, and an electronic device.
- One embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a display device.
- one aspect of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field.
- Technical fields of one embodiment of the present invention include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, memory devices, electronic devices, lighting devices, input devices (eg, touch sensors), input/output devices (eg, touch panels), and the like. or methods of manufacturing them.
- display devices are expected to be applied to various purposes.
- applications of large display devices include home television devices (also referred to as televisions or television receivers), digital signage (digital signage), and PIDs (Public Information Displays).
- mobile information terminals such as smart phones and tablet terminals with touch panels are being developed.
- Devices that require high-definition display devices include, for example, virtual reality (VR), augmented reality (AR), alternative reality (SR), and mixed reality (MR) ) are being actively developed.
- VR virtual reality
- AR augmented reality
- SR alternative reality
- MR mixed reality
- a light-emitting device having a light-emitting device As a display device, for example, a light-emitting device having a light-emitting device (also referred to as a light-emitting element) has been developed.
- a light-emitting device also referred to as an EL device or EL element
- EL the phenomenon of electroluminescence
- EL is a DC constant-voltage power supply that can easily be made thin and light, can respond quickly to an input signal, and It is applied to a display device.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a display device for VR using an organic EL device (also called an organic EL element).
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a high-definition display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a high-resolution display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a display device with high display quality.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a display device with high definition.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a display device with high resolution.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a display device with high display quality.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable method for manufacturing a display device.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a display device with high yield.
- An object of one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a novel method for manufacturing a display device.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a display device including a transistor, a light-emitting device, a first insulating layer, a second insulating layer, and a first conductive layer.
- the transistor has a semiconductor layer and a second conductive layer electrically connected to the semiconductor layer.
- a light emitting device has a pixel electrode.
- a first insulating layer is provided over the transistor and has a first opening reaching the second conductive layer.
- a first conductive layer covers the first opening.
- the second insulating layer is provided on the first insulating layer and has a second opening in a region overlapping with the first opening.
- a pixel electrode covers the top surface of the second insulating layer and the second opening.
- the pixel electrode is electrically connected to the second conductive layer through the first conductive layer.
- An edge of the first insulating layer overlies the second conductive layer.
- An edge of the second insulating layer overlies the first conductive layer.
- the end of the second insulating layer is
- the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer preferably each contain an organic material.
- the display device described above preferably has a layer.
- the pixel electrode preferably has a third conductive layer and a fourth conductive layer over the third conductive layer.
- the third conductive layer preferably covers the top surface of the second insulating layer and the second opening.
- the third conductive layer preferably has recesses along the shape of the side surface of the second insulating layer and the top surface of the second conductive layer.
- the layer is preferably provided so as to fill the recess.
- the fourth conductive layer preferably covers the top surface of the third conductive layer and the top surface of the layer.
- the fourth conductive layer preferably comprises a material that is reflective to visible light.
- the layer is preferably an insulating layer.
- the layer is preferably a conductive layer.
- the display device described above preferably has a third insulating layer.
- the third insulating layer is preferably provided in contact with the upper surface of the second insulating layer.
- the third insulating layer comprises an inorganic material.
- the pixel electrode preferably has a region in contact with the top surface of the third insulating layer.
- the display device described above preferably has a fourth insulating layer.
- the fourth insulating layer is preferably provided in contact with the upper surface of the first insulating layer.
- the fourth insulating layer preferably comprises an inorganic material.
- the first conductive layer preferably has a region in contact with the top surface of the fourth insulating layer.
- the display device described above preferably has a fifth insulating layer and a sixth insulating layer.
- the light-emitting device preferably has a pixel electrode, a common electrode, and an EL layer sandwiched between the pixel electrode and the common electrode.
- the fifth insulating layer preferably covers part of the top surface and side surfaces of the EL layer.
- the sixth insulating layer preferably covers part of the top surface and side surfaces of the EL layer with the fifth insulating layer interposed therebetween.
- the common electrode preferably covers the sixth insulating layer.
- the fifth insulating layer preferably contains an inorganic material.
- the sixth insulating layer comprises an organic material.
- the display device described above preferably has a fifth insulating layer.
- the light-emitting device preferably has a pixel electrode, a common electrode, and an EL layer sandwiched between the pixel electrode and the common electrode.
- the fifth insulating layer preferably covers part of the top surface and side surfaces of the pixel electrode.
- the EL layer preferably has a region in contact with the top surface of the fifth insulating layer.
- the common electrode preferably covers the fifth insulating layer.
- the transistor has a gate insulating layer interposed between the semiconductor layer and the gate electrode.
- the semiconductor layer comprises a metal oxide.
- the concentration of the metal element contained in the metal oxide in the gate insulating layer is preferably 2 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- a high-definition display device can be provided. Further, a display device with high resolution can be provided. Further, a display device with high display quality can be provided. In addition, a highly reliable display device can be provided. Also, a novel display device can be provided.
- a method for manufacturing a display device with high definition can be provided. Further, a method for manufacturing a display device with high resolution can be provided. Further, a method for manufacturing a display device with high display quality can be provided. Further, a highly reliable method for manufacturing a display device can be provided. Further, a method for manufacturing a display device with high yield can be provided. Further, a novel method for manufacturing a display device can be provided.
- FIG. 1 is a top view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 3A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- 3B and 3C are top views showing examples of openings.
- 4A and 4B are diagrams showing band diagrams.
- FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 5B is a top view showing an example of a light emitting device.
- 6A and 6B are cross-sectional views showing an example of the display device.
- 7A and 7B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a display device.
- 8A and 8B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 9A and 9B are cross-sectional views showing an example of the display device.
- 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views showing an example of a display device.
- 12A and 12B are cross-sectional views showing examples of display devices.
- FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 19 is a top view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- 21A to 21D are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 22A to 22C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 23A and 23B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 24A and 24B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 25A and 25B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 26A and 26B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 27A and 27B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 28A to 28C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 29A and 29B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 30A and 30B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 31A and 31B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 32A and 32B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 33A and 33B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 34A and 34B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 35A and 35B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 36A to 36C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 37A and 37B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 38A to 38C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 39A and 39B are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 40A to 40C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 41A to 41C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 42A to 42C are cross-sectional views illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a display device.
- 43A to 43G are diagrams showing examples of pixels.
- 44A to 44K are diagrams showing examples of pixels.
- FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
- 49A to 49F are diagrams showing configuration examples of light emitting devices.
- 50A to 50C are diagrams showing configuration examples of light emitting devices.
- 51A and 51B are diagrams showing configuration examples of light receiving devices.
- 51C to 51E are diagrams showing configuration examples of display devices.
- 52A to 52D are diagrams showing examples of electronic devices.
- 53A to 53F are diagrams showing examples of electronic devices.
- 54A to 54G are diagrams showing examples of electronic devices.
- FIG. 55 is a diagram showing variations in electrical characteristics of transistors due to NBTIS tests.
- 56A and 56C are diagrams showing Id-Vg characteristics of transistors.
- 56B and 56D are diagrams showing the amount of variation in electrical characteristics of transistors due to the NBTIS test.
- FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional STEM image of a sample according to Example.
- film and “layer” can be interchanged depending on the case or situation.
- conductive layer can be changed to the term “conductive film.”
- insulating film can be changed to the term “insulating layer”.
- a device manufactured using a metal mask or FMM may be referred to as a device with an MM (metal mask) structure.
- a device manufactured without using a metal mask or FMM may be referred to as a device with an MML (metal maskless) structure.
- an SBS side-by-side structure
- the material and configuration can be optimized for each light-emitting device, so the degree of freedom in selecting the material and configuration increases, and it becomes easy to improve luminance and reliability.
- holes or electrons are sometimes referred to as "carriers".
- the hole injection layer or electron injection layer is referred to as a "carrier injection layer”
- the hole transport layer or electron transport layer is referred to as a “carrier transport layer”
- the hole blocking layer or electron blocking layer is referred to as a "carrier It is sometimes called a block layer.
- the carrier injection layer, the carrier transport layer, and the carrier block layer described above may not be clearly distinguished from each other due to their cross-sectional shape, characteristics, or the like.
- one layer may serve as two or three functions of the carrier injection layer, the carrier transport layer, and the carrier block layer.
- a light-emitting device (also referred to as a light-emitting element) has an EL layer between a pair of electrodes.
- the EL layer has at least a light-emitting layer.
- the layers (also referred to as functional layers) included in the EL layer include a light-emitting layer, a carrier-injection layer (a hole-injection layer and an electron-injection layer), a carrier-transport layer (a hole-transport layer and an electron-transport layer), and a carrier layer.
- block layers (hole block layer and electron block layer);
- a light-receiving device (also referred to as a light-receiving element) has an active layer that functions at least as a photoelectric conversion layer between a pair of electrodes.
- an island-shaped light-emitting layer means that the light-emitting layer is physically separated from an adjacent light-emitting layer.
- a tapered shape refers to a shape in which at least a part of the side surface of the structure is inclined with respect to the substrate surface. For example, it is preferable to have a region where the angle between the inclined side surface and the substrate surface (also referred to as a taper angle) is less than 90°. Note that the side surfaces of the structure and the substrate surface do not necessarily have to be completely flat, and may be substantially planar with a minute curvature or substantially planar with minute unevenness.
- a mask layer is positioned above at least a light-emitting layer (more specifically, a layer processed into an island shape among layers constituting an EL layer), It has the function of protecting the light-emitting layer.
- discontinuity refers to a phenomenon in which a layer, film, or electrode is divided due to the shape of the formation surface (for example, steps).
- One embodiment of the present invention is a display device including a transistor, a light-emitting device, a first insulating layer, a second insulating layer, and a first conductive layer.
- a first insulating layer is provided over the transistor, a second insulating layer is provided over the first insulating layer, and a light emitting device is provided over the second insulating layer.
- the transistor has a semiconductor layer and a second conductive layer electrically connected to the semiconductor layer.
- the second conductive layer functions as the source or drain of the transistor.
- the first insulating layer has a first opening reaching the second conductive layer.
- a first conductive layer is provided to cover the first opening.
- the second insulating layer has a second opening in a region overlapping the first opening.
- a pixel electrode included in the light-emitting device is provided so as to cover the upper surface of the second insulating layer and the second opening. The pixel electrode is electrically connected to the second conductive layer through the first conductive layer.
- the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer each function as a planarizing layer.
- the first insulating layer and the second insulating layer each comprise an organic material.
- a transistor constitutes a pixel circuit that controls a light-emitting device.
- the transistor is electrically connected to the pixel electrode provided to cover the second opening through the first conductive layer provided to cover the first opening.
- the end of the first insulating layer on the first opening side is located on the second conductive layer, and the end of the second insulating layer on the second opening side is located on the first conductive layer. Located in Furthermore, the edge of the second insulating layer is located outside the edge of the first insulating layer.
- the second insulating layer has a portion protruding from the end of the first insulating layer. That is, the second opening is provided inside the first opening when viewed from above (also referred to as planar view).
- the first opening can also be said to encompass the second opening.
- FIG. 1 shows two rows and two columns of pixels 110 . Also, sub-pixels for 2 rows and 6 columns are shown as a configuration in which each pixel 110 has three sub-pixels (sub-pixel 11R, sub-pixel 11G, and sub-pixel 11B).
- the connection portion 140 can also be called a cathode contact portion.
- Each sub-pixel has a display device (also called a display element).
- display devices include liquid crystal devices (also referred to as liquid crystal elements) and light-emitting devices (also referred to as light-emitting elements).
- the light emitting device for example, an OLED (Organic Light Emitting Diode) or a QLED (Quantum-dot Light Emitting Diode) is preferably used.
- the light-emitting substance included in the light-emitting device include a substance that emits fluorescence (fluorescent material), a substance that emits phosphorescence (phosphorescent material), and a substance that exhibits thermally activated delayed fluorescence (thermally activated delayed fluorescence: TADF). materials), and inorganic compounds (quantum dot materials, etc.).
- LEDs such as micro LED (Light Emitting Diode), can also be used as a light emitting device.
- the emission color of the light emitting device can be infrared, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow, white, or the like.
- color purity can be enhanced by providing a light-emitting device with a microcavity structure.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes a light-emitting device manufactured for each emission color, and is capable of full-color display.
- the top surface shape of the sub-pixel shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to the top surface shape of the light emitting region of the light emitting device.
- the top surface shape of a sub-pixel can be, for example, a triangle, a quadrangle (including a rectangle and a square), a polygon such as a pentagon, a shape with rounded corners of these polygons, an ellipse, or a circle.
- Each sub-pixel has a pixel circuit that controls a light-emitting device.
- the pixel circuit is not limited to the extent of the sub-pixels shown in FIG. 1 and the components of the circuit may be arranged outside thereof.
- the transistors included in the pixel circuit of the sub-pixel 11R may be located within the range of the sub-pixel 11G shown in FIG. 1, or part or all of them may be located outside the range of the sub-pixel 11R.
- the sub-pixel 11R, the sub-pixel 11G, and the sub-pixel 11B have the same or approximately the same aperture ratio (the sizes of the light-emitting regions can also be said to be the same or approximately the same), but one embodiment of the present invention is limited to this. not.
- the aperture ratios of the sub-pixel 11R, the sub-pixel 11G, and the sub-pixel 11B can be determined appropriately.
- the sub-pixel 11R, the sub-pixel 11G, and the sub-pixel 11B may have different aperture ratios, or two or more of them may be equal or approximately equal.
- a stripe arrangement is applied to the pixels 110 shown in FIG.
- a pixel 110 shown in FIG. 1 is composed of three sub-pixels, a sub-pixel 11R, a sub-pixel 11G, and a sub-pixel 11B.
- the sub-pixel 11R, sub-pixel 11G, and sub-pixel 11B exhibit different colors of light.
- As the sub-pixel 11R, sub-pixel 11G, and sub-pixel 11B three sub-pixels of red (R), green (G), blue (B), yellow (Y), cyan (C), and magenta (M) are used. , and the like.
- the number of sub-pixel color types is not limited to three, and may be four or more.
- four-color sub-pixels As the four-color sub-pixels, four-color sub-pixels of R, G, B, and white (W), four-color sub-pixels of R, G, B, and Y, and R, G, B, and infrared light (IR) four color sub-pixels.
- W white
- IR infrared light
- FIG. 1 shows an example in which sub-pixels of different colors are arranged side by side in the X direction and sub-pixels of the same color are arranged side by side in the Y direction.
- FIG. 1 shows an example in which the connecting portion 140 is positioned on one side of the display portion when viewed from above
- the connecting portion 140 may be provided at least one of the upper side, the right side, the left side, and the lower side of the display portion when viewed from above, and may be provided so as to surround the four sides of the display portion.
- the shape of the upper surface of the connecting portion 140 is not particularly limited, and may be strip-shaped, L-shaped, U-shaped, frame-shaped, or the like.
- the number of connection parts 140 may be singular or plural.
- FIG. 2 shows a cross-sectional view between the dashed-dotted line X1-X2 and the dashed-dotted line Y1-Y2 in FIG.
- the display device 100 has a light emitting device 130R, a light emitting device 130G, and a light emitting device 130B provided on a layer 101, and a protective layer 131 is provided to cover these light emitting devices.
- a substrate 120 is bonded onto the protective layer 131 with a resin layer 122 .
- Layer 101 has transistor 205R, transistor 205G, and transistor 205B.
- An insulating layer 214 and an insulating layer 235 over the insulating layer 214 are provided to cover the transistors 205R, 205G, and 205B.
- the insulating layer 214 has openings 191R, 191G, and 191B, and conductive layers 233R, 233G, and 233B are provided to cover the openings.
- the insulating layer 235 has an opening 193R, an opening 193G, and an opening 193B, and electrodes of the light emitting device 130R, the light emitting device 130G, and the light emitting device 130B are provided so as to cover the openings.
- Light emitting device 130R is electrically connected to transistor 205R through conductive layer 233R.
- Light emitting device 130G is electrically connected to transistor 205G through conductive layer 233G.
- Light emitting device 130B is electrically connected to transistor 205B through conductive layer 233B.
- the light-emitting device 130 When describing items common to the light-emitting device 130R, the light-emitting device 130G, and the light-emitting device 130B, they may be referred to as the light-emitting device 130, omitting the letters that distinguish them. Similarly, for constituent elements that are distinguished by letters, such as the transistor 205R, the transistor 205G, and the transistor 205B, there are cases where the letters are omitted when describing common items.
- Each of the light emitting device 130R, the light emitting device 130G, and the light emitting device 130B has a pair of electrodes and a layer sandwiched between the pair of electrodes.
- the layer has at least a light-emitting layer.
- one electrode functions as an anode and the other electrode functions as a cathode.
- the case where the pixel electrode functions as an anode and the common electrode functions as a cathode may be taken as an example.
- the light-emitting device 130R includes a pixel electrode 111R on the insulating layer 235, an island-shaped layer 113R on the pixel electrode 111R, a common layer 114 on the island-shaped layer 113R, and a common electrode 115 on the common layer 114. have.
- layer 113R and common layer 114 can be collectively referred to as EL layers.
- the light-emitting device 130G includes a pixel electrode 111G on the insulating layer 235, an island-shaped layer 113G on the pixel electrode 111G, a common layer 114 on the island-shaped layer 113G, and a common electrode 115 on the common layer 114. have.
- layer 113G and common layer 114 can be collectively referred to as EL layers.
- the light-emitting device 130B includes a pixel electrode 111B on the insulating layer 235, an island-shaped layer 113B on the pixel electrode 111B, a common layer 114 on the island-shaped layer 113B, and a common electrode 115 on the common layer 114. have.
- layer 113B and common layer 114 can be collectively referred to as EL layers.
- a layer provided in an island shape for each light-emitting device is indicated as a layer 113R, a layer 113G, or a layer 113B, and a layer shared by a plurality of light-emitting devices is indicated. Shown as common layer 114 .
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B, excluding the common layer 114 may be referred to as an island-shaped EL layer, an island-shaped EL layer, or the like.
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B are island-shaped and separated from each other.
- an island-shaped EL layer for each light-emitting device, leakage current between adjacent light-emitting devices can be suppressed. Thereby, crosstalk due to unintended light emission can be prevented, and a display device with extremely high contrast can be realized. In particular, a display device with high current efficiency at low luminance can be realized.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention is a top emission type in which light is emitted in a direction opposite to a substrate over which a light-emitting device is formed, and light is emitted toward a substrate over which a light-emitting device is formed.
- a bottom emission type bottom emission type
- a double emission type dual emission type in which light is emitted from both sides may be used.
- Layer 101 preferably includes pixel circuits that function to control light emitting devices 130 .
- a pixel circuit can have a structure including a transistor, a capacitor, and a wiring, for example.
- the layer 101 may have one or both of a gate line driver circuit (gate driver) and a source line driver circuit (source driver) in addition to the pixel circuit.
- Layer 101 may further include one or both of arithmetic circuitry and memory circuitry.
- the layer 101 can have a structure in which a pixel circuit is provided on a semiconductor substrate or an insulating substrate.
- a semiconductor substrate a single crystal semiconductor substrate made of silicon or silicon carbide, a polycrystalline semiconductor substrate, a compound semiconductor substrate made of silicon germanium or the like, an SOI substrate, or the like can be used.
- a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a sapphire substrate, a ceramic substrate, or an organic resin substrate can be used as the insulating substrate.
- the shape of the semiconductor substrate and the insulating substrate may be circular or rectangular.
- a substrate having heat resistance that can withstand at least later heat treatment can be used.
- FIG. 2 shows a transistor 205R, a transistor 205G, and a transistor 205B as transistors included in the layer 101.
- FIG. 2 shows a cross-sectional view of the transistor 205R, the transistor 205G, and the transistor 205B in the channel length direction.
- transistor 205R An enlarged view of transistor 205R, light emitting device 130R, and the vicinity thereof shown in FIG. 2 is shown in FIG. 3A.
- the transistor 205R has a semiconductor layer 231, an insulating layer 218, and a conductive layer 223 stacked in this order.
- a portion of the insulating layer 225 functions as a gate insulating layer of the transistor 205R.
- the conductive layer 223 functions as a gate electrode of the transistor 205R.
- the transistor 205R is a so-called top-gate transistor in which a gate electrode is provided over the semiconductor layer 231 .
- the semiconductor layer 231 has a channel formation region 231i and a pair of low resistance regions 231n.
- the channel formation region 231i has a region overlapping with the conductive layer 223 with the insulating layer 218 interposed therebetween.
- the transistor 205R further includes an insulating layer 218 and conductive layers 222a and 222b.
- the insulating layer 218 is provided over the insulating layer 225 and the conductive layer 223 .
- the insulating layer 218 and the insulating layer 225 have openings reaching the low resistance regions 231n.
- a conductive layer 222a and a conductive layer 222b are provided to cover the opening.
- Conductive layer 222a is electrically connected to one of the pair of low-resistance regions 231n
- conductive layer 222b is electrically connected to the other of the pair of low-resistance regions 231n.
- One of the conductive layers 222a and 222b functions as a source, and the other functions as a drain.
- the transistor 205R can be said to be a TGSA (Top Gate Self Align) type transistor.
- the insulating layer 218 functions as a protective layer for the transistor 205R.
- the insulating layer 218 is preferably made of a material into which impurities are difficult to diffuse. By providing the insulating layer 218, diffusion of impurities from the outside into the transistor can be effectively suppressed, and the reliability of the display device can be improved. Impurities include, for example, water and hydrogen.
- the insulating layer 218 can be an insulating layer with an inorganic material or an insulating layer with an organic material. For the insulating layer 218, an inorganic material such as oxide or nitride can be preferably used.
- silicon nitride, silicon nitride oxide, silicon oxynitride, aluminum oxide, aluminum oxynitride, aluminum nitride, hafnium oxide, and hafnium aluminate can be used.
- the organic material for example, one or more of acrylic resin and polyimide resin can be used.
- a photosensitive material may be used as the organic material.
- two or more of the insulating films described above may be laminated and used.
- the insulating layer 218 may have a stacked-layer structure of an insulating layer containing an inorganic material and an insulating layer containing an organic material.
- Gates may be provided above and below the semiconductor layer 231, and the semiconductor layer 231 may be sandwiched between the two gates.
- transistor 205R has conductive layer 221 and insulating layer 211 between substrate 151 and semiconductor layer 231 .
- the conductive layer 221 has a region which overlaps with the semiconductor layer 231 with the insulating layer 211 provided therebetween, and has a region which overlaps with the conductive layer 223 with the semiconductor layer 231 provided therebetween.
- the conductive layer 223 functions as a first gate electrode (also referred to as a top gate electrode), and the conductive layer 221 functions as a second gate electrode (also referred to as a bottom gate electrode).
- part of the insulating layer 225 functions as a first gate insulating layer and part of the insulating layer 211 functions as a second gate insulating layer.
- a portion of the semiconductor layer 231 overlapping with at least one of the conductive layer 223 and the conductive layer 221 functions as a channel formation region of the transistor 205R. Note that a portion of the semiconductor layer 231 which overlaps with the conductive layer 223 is sometimes referred to as a channel formation region in order to simplify the description below.
- a channel can also be formed in (a portion including the low resistance region 231n).
- the transistor may be driven by connecting two gates and supplying the same signal to them.
- the threshold voltage of the transistor may be controlled by applying a potential for controlling the threshold voltage to one of the two gates and applying a potential for driving to the other.
- the transistor 205G and the transistor 205B can have the same structure as the transistor 205R. Since the description of the transistor 205R can be referred to for the transistor 205G and the transistor 205B, detailed description thereof is omitted. Note that different structures may be applied to the transistor 205R, the transistor 205G, and the transistor 205B.
- the semiconductor layer 231 of the transistor 205 included in the display device of one embodiment of the present invention preferably includes a metal oxide (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor or an OS) exhibiting semiconductor characteristics.
- the display device of this embodiment preferably uses a transistor including a metal oxide for a channel formation region (hereinafter also referred to as an OS transistor).
- OS transistors have much higher field-effect mobility than transistors using amorphous silicon.
- an OS transistor has extremely low source-drain leakage current (hereinafter also referred to as an off-state current) in an off state, and can retain charge accumulated in a capacitor connected in series with the transistor for a long time. is possible. Further, by using the OS transistor, power consumption of the display device can be reduced.
- the display device may be used in a high-temperature environment or in an environment with strong external light. Also, part of the light emitted from the light emitting device 130 may reach the transistor 205 in the display device. If the electrical characteristics of the transistor change due to high temperature or light, the display quality of the display device might be degraded. Therefore, it is preferable that the transistor 205 applied to the display device have small variations in electrical characteristics against high temperature and light, that is, have high reliability. By applying a transistor with high reliability to high temperatures and light to a display device, the display device can have high display quality and high reliability.
- FIG. 4A the left side shows a band diagram of a metal oxide (OS) included in the semiconductor layer 231, and the right side shows a band diagram of an oxide containing silicon included in the insulating layer 225 functioning as a gate insulating layer (GI).
- OS metal oxide
- GI gate insulating layer
- the mechanism of change in electrical characteristics of the OS transistor due to light is presumed as follows. First, when a metal oxide is irradiated with light (hv), electrons (carriers) existing in the valence band (Ev) or deep level (dDOS: deep density of states) of the metal oxide are transferred to the conduction band ( Ec). A deep level of the metal oxide is presumed to be a level derived from oxygen vacancies (V O ) in the metal oxide. Electron excitation into the metal oxide conduction band (Ec) then creates holes in the metal oxide valence band (Ev) or deep levels.
- a negative bias is applied between the gate and the source, holes are accumulated at and near the interface between the metal oxide and the gate insulating layer. At this time, if there is a defect level (“GI defects” in FIG. 4A) at and near the interface, holes are trapped in the defect level (“Hole Injection” in FIG. 4A). Therefore, the threshold voltage of the OS transistor shifts in the negative direction.
- the insulating layer 225 functioning as a gate insulating layer preferably has few defect levels.
- an oxide containing silicon can be used. Specifically, silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride can be used for the insulating layer 225 .
- defect levels of the gate insulating layer include an oxygen atom bonded to one silicon atom and a nitrogen atom bonded to two silicon atoms.
- An oxygen atom bonded to one silicon atom may be referred to as a non-bridging oxygen hole center (NBOHC), and a nitrogen atom bonded to two silicon atoms may be referred to as NO .
- NBOHC and N 2 O have dangling bonds, and the threshold voltage may fluctuate due to holes trapped in the dangling bonds. Therefore, the insulating layer 225 is preferably low in NBOHC and NO .
- An example of the defect level of the insulating layer 225 is a level derived from a defect formed by diffusion of atoms contained in the metal oxide into the insulating layer 225 .
- a defect in which a silicon atom included in the insulating layer 225 is replaced with a metal atom contained in the metal oxide.
- the defects include defects in which silicon atoms are replaced with indium atoms, gallium atoms, or zinc atoms.
- a defect in which a silicon atom is replaced by an indium atom is denoted as In Si
- a defect in which a silicon atom is replaced by a gallium atom is denoted as Ga Si
- a defect in which a silicon atom is replaced by a zinc atom is denoted as Zn Si .
- M Si defects defects in which silicon atoms in the insulating layer 225 are replaced by metal atoms contained in the metal oxide may be collectively referred to as M Si (“M Si defects” in FIG. 4B ).
- M Si defects defects in which silicon atoms in the insulating layer 225 are replaced by metal atoms contained in the metal oxide.
- FIG. 4B shows levels due to M 2 Si and levels due to substances other than M 2 Si (eg, NBOHC and N 2 O 3 ).
- Degradation with a small time constant, that is, fast degradation (“Fast degradation” in FIG. 4B) and degradation with a large time constant, that is, slow degradation (“Slow degradation” in FIG. 4B) are schematically indicated by arrows. showing.
- the metal oxide included in the semiconductor layer 231 preferably has high crystallinity. By increasing the crystallinity of the metal oxide, diffusion of the metal element contained in the metal oxide into the insulating layer 225 can be suppressed. Therefore, formation of In Si , Ga Si , and Zn Si can be suppressed.
- the concentration of the metal element contained in the metal oxide is preferably low in the insulating layer 225 .
- the concentration of the metal element in the insulating layer 225 is preferably 2 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 19 atoms/cm 3 or less, further preferably 8 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less. It is preferably 5 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less.
- the concentration of the metal element in the insulating layer 225 can be evaluated using, for example, secondary ion mass spectrometry (SIMS).
- SIMS secondary ion mass spectrometry
- the indium concentration, the gallium concentration, and the zinc concentration in the insulating layer 225 are preferably within the ranges described above. Note that the lower the concentration of the metal element in the insulating layer 225 is, the better it is, so there is no particular need to set the lower limit of the concentration.
- the concentration of the metal element to be contained is within the range described above. Further, in the insulating layer 211 functioning as the second gate insulating layer, the concentration of the metal element contained in the metal oxide is preferably within the above range.
- GBT Gate Bias Temperature
- PBTS Positive Bias Temperature Stress
- NBTS Negative Bias Temperature Stress
- the PBTS test and the NBTS test which are performed under light irradiation, are called PBTIS (Positive Bias Temperature Illumination Stress) test and NBTIS (Negative Bias Temperature Illumination Stress) test, respectively.
- a transistor that is applied to a display device of one embodiment of the present invention preferably has a small change in electrical characteristics in an NBTIS test (hereinafter also referred to as NBTIS deterioration).
- TGSA transistor is described as an example here, the structure of the transistor that can be applied to the display device of one embodiment of the present invention is not particularly limited.
- An insulating layer 214 and an insulating layer 235 over the insulating layer 214 are provided over the transistor 205R, the transistor 205G, and the transistor 205B.
- the insulating layers 214 and 235 each have a function of reducing unevenness caused by the transistors 205R, 205G, and 205B and making the top surface of the layer 101 flatter. Note that in this specification and the like, the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235 are sometimes referred to as planarization layers.
- An insulating layer containing an organic material can be preferably used for each of the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235 .
- the organic material it is preferable to use a photosensitive organic resin, for example, it is preferable to use a photosensitive resin composition containing an acrylic resin.
- acrylic resin does not only refer to polymethacrylate esters or methacrylic resins, but may refer to all acrylic polymers in a broad sense.
- the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235 are made of acrylic resin, polyimide resin, epoxy resin, imide resin, polyamide resin, polyimideamide resin, silicone resin, siloxane resin, benzocyclobutene resin, phenol resin, and precursors of these resins, respectively. etc. may be used.
- the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235 are each made of an organic material such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl butyral, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol, polyglycerin, pullulan, water-soluble cellulose, or alcohol-soluble polyamide resin. good too.
- a photoresist may also be used as the photosensitive resin.
- As the photosensitive organic resin either a positive material or a negative material may be used. The same organic material may be used for the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235, or different organic materials may be used.
- the insulating layer 214 may have a laminated structure of an organic insulating layer and an inorganic insulating layer.
- the insulating layer 214 can have a stacked structure of an organic insulating layer and an inorganic insulating layer over the organic insulating layer.
- an inorganic insulating layer on the outermost surface of the insulating layer 214, it can function as an etching protection layer. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the insulating layer 214 from being partially etched at the time of forming the conductive layer 233 and lowering the flatness of the insulating layer 214 .
- the insulating layer 235 may also have a laminated structure of an organic insulating layer and an inorganic insulating layer.
- the insulating layer 214 may have a laminated structure of an inorganic insulating layer and an organic insulating layer over the inorganic insulating layer. The same applies to the insulating layer 235 .
- the surface over which the light-emitting device 130 is formed (here, the insulating layer 235) can be made flatter. .
- the flatness of the upper surface of the insulating layer 235 which is the surface on which the light-emitting device 130 is formed, is low, for example, connection failure due to disconnection of the common electrode, or local thinning of the common electrode 115, Resistance may increase. Further, when the planarity of the top surface of the insulating layer 235 is low, the processing accuracy of layers formed over the insulating layer 235 may be low.
- two or more insulating layers functioning as planarization layers are provided over the transistors 205R, 205G, and 205B, so that the surface on which the light-emitting device 130 is formed is planarized. can be done. Therefore, by flattening the top surface of the insulating layer 235, the processing accuracy of the light-emitting device 130 and the like provided over the insulating layer 235 is improved, and a display device with high definition can be obtained. In addition, it is possible to prevent a connection failure due to step disconnection of the common electrode and an increase in electrical resistance due to a local thinning of the common electrode 115, so that a display device with high display quality can be obtained.
- the insulating layer functioning as a planarization layer has a two-layer structure (the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235) here, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this.
- An insulating layer functioning as a planarization layer may have a laminated structure of three or more layers. Note that although the insulating layers 214 and 235 each have a single-layer structure in FIG. 2 and the like, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. Each of the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235 may have a laminated structure.
- the insulating layer 214 has openings 191R, 191G, and 191B.
- the opening 191R has a region overlapping with the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R, and the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R is exposed at the opening 191R.
- a conductive layer 233R is provided to cover the opening 191R.
- the conductive layer 233R has regions in contact with the side surface of the insulating layer 214 and the top surface of the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R.
- the conductive layer 233R may have a region in contact with the top surface of the insulating layer 214 .
- the opening 191G has a region overlapping with the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205G, and the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205G is exposed at the opening 191G.
- a conductive layer 233G is provided to cover the opening 191G.
- the conductive layer 233G has regions in contact with the side surface of the insulating layer 214 and the top surface of the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205G.
- the conductive layer 233G may have a region in contact with the top surface of the insulating layer 214 .
- the opening 191B has a region overlapping with the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205B, and the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205B is exposed at the opening 191B.
- a conductive layer 233B is provided to cover the opening 191B.
- the conductive layer 233B has regions in contact with the side surface of the insulating layer 214 and the top surface of the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205B.
- the conductive layer 233B may have a region in contact with the top surface of the insulating layer 214 .
- the insulating layer 235 has openings 193R, 193G, and 193B.
- the opening 193R has a region overlapping the conductive layer 233R, and the conductive layer 233R is exposed at the opening 193R.
- a pixel electrode 111R is provided to cover the opening 193R.
- the pixel electrode 111R has a region in contact with the side surface of the insulating layer 235 and the upper surface of the conductive layer 233R. That is, the light emitting device 130R is electrically connected to the transistor 205R through the conductive layer 233R.
- the opening 193G has a region overlapping with the conductive layer 233G, and the conductive layer 233G is exposed at the opening 193G.
- a pixel electrode 111G is provided to cover the opening 193G.
- the pixel electrode 111G has a region in contact with the side surface of the insulating layer 235 and the top surface of the conductive layer 233G. That is, light emitting device 130G is electrically connected to transistor 205G through conductive layer 233G.
- the opening 193B has a region overlapping with the conductive layer 233B, and the conductive layer 233B is exposed at the opening 193B.
- a pixel electrode 111B is provided to cover the opening 193B.
- the pixel electrode 111B has a region in contact with the side surface of the insulating layer 235 and the top surface of the conductive layer 233B. That is, the light emitting device 130B is electrically connected to the transistor 205B through the conductive layer 233B.
- the opening 191R is provided on the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R.
- opening 191G is provided over conductive layer 222b of transistor 205G.
- Opening 191B is provided over conductive layer 222b of transistor 205B. That is, the end portions of the insulating layer 214 are preferably located over the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R, the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205G, and the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205B.
- the width 191d of the opening 191R in cross section is indicated by a double arrow. The width 191d can also be said to be the distance between the ends of the insulating layer 214 facing each other on the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R.
- the opening 193R is provided on the conductive layer 233R.
- opening 193G is provided over conductive layer 233G.
- Opening 193B is provided on conductive layer 233B.
- the end portions of the insulating layer 235 are preferably positioned over the conductive layers 233R, 233G, and 233B.
- the width 193d of the opening 193R in cross section is indicated by a double arrow.
- the width 193d can also be said to be the distance between the ends of the insulating layer 235 facing each other on the conductive layer 233R.
- the conductive layer 222b, the conductive layer 233R, and the pixel electrode 111R of the transistor 205R preferably have overlapping regions.
- the conductive layer 222b, the conductive layer 233G, and the pixel electrode 111G of the transistor 205G preferably have regions that overlap with each other.
- the conductive layer 222b, the conductive layer 233B, and the pixel electrode 111B of the transistor 205B preferably have regions that overlap with each other.
- the opening 193G preferably has a region that overlaps with the opening 191G.
- Aperture 193B preferably has a region that overlaps with aperture 191B.
- the openings 193R, 193G, and 193G in regions overlapping with the openings 191R, 191G, and 191B, the area occupied by the pixel circuit can be reduced. Therefore, a high-definition display device can be obtained.
- the top surface shape of the opening 191R, the opening 191G, the opening 191B, the opening 193R, the opening 193G, and the opening 193B is, for example, a triangle, a quadrangle (including rectangle and square), a polygon, a shape with rounded corners, an ellipse, or a circle.
- FIGS. 3B and 3C Examples of top surface shapes of the opening 191R and the opening 193R are shown in FIGS. 3B and 3C.
- 3B and 3C each show an example in which the opening 191R, the opening 191G, the opening 191B, the opening 193R, the opening 193G, and the opening 193B have rounded corners when viewed from above.
- the top surface shapes of the opening 191R, the opening 191G, and the opening 191B may be the same or different.
- the top surface shapes of the opening 193R, the opening 193G, and the opening 193B may be the same or different.
- the top surface shape of the opening 191R, the opening 191G, and the opening 191B and the top surface shape of the opening 193R, the opening 193G, and the opening 193B may be the same or different.
- the opening 191R, the opening 191G, and the opening 191B may have rounded corners, and the opening 193R, the opening 193G, and the opening 193B may have a circular shape.
- the opening 193R is preferably located inside the opening 191R.
- opening 193G is preferably located inside opening 191G.
- the opening 193G is preferably located inside the opening 191G.
- the edge of the insulating layer 214 be located outside the edge of the insulating layer 235 .
- the display device can have high display quality.
- the opening 193R, the opening 193G, the opening 193G, the opening 191R, the opening 191G, and the opening 191B is reduced, the area occupied by the pixel circuit is reduced, and a high-definition display device can be obtained.
- each of the width 191d and the width 193d is small.
- the width 191d is, for example, preferably 6 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 4 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 3 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 2 ⁇ m or less.
- the width 193d is preferably 6 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 4 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 3 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 2 ⁇ m or less.
- the width 193d is preferably smaller than the width 191d.
- the width 193d is preferably smaller than the width 191d.
- the shape of the top surface of the opening 191 corresponds to the shape of the end of the insulating layer 214 when viewed from above.
- the width 191d of the opening 191 refers to the shortest rectangular short side that circumscribes the opening 191 when viewed from above.
- the shape of the top surface of the opening 193 corresponds to the shape of the edge of the insulating layer 235 when viewed from the top.
- a width 193d of the opening 193 refers to the shortest rectangular short side that circumscribes the opening 193 when viewed from above.
- a pixel electrode 111R, a pixel electrode 111G, and a pixel electrode 111B included in the light emitting device 130R, the light emitting device 130G, and the light emitting device 130B will be described.
- the pixel electrode 111R of the light emitting device 130R has a laminated structure of a conductive layer 112R, a conductive layer 126R on the conductive layer 112R, and a conductive layer 129R on the conductive layer 126R.
- the pixel electrode 111G included in the light emitting device 130G has a laminated structure of a conductive layer 112G, a conductive layer 126G over the conductive layer 112G, and a conductive layer 129G over the conductive layer 126G.
- a pixel electrode 111B included in the light-emitting device 130B has a layered structure of a conductive layer 112B, a conductive layer 126B over the conductive layer 112B, and a conductive layer 129B over the conductive layer 126B.
- the conductive layer 112R is electrically connected to the conductive layer 233R through the opening 193R provided in the insulating layer 235.
- the conductive layer 112R is electrically connected to the conductive layer 222b included in the transistor 205 through the conductive layer 233R.
- the end of the conductive layer 112R is positioned outside the end of the conductive layer 126R.
- the end of the conductive layer 126R is located inside the end of the conductive layer 129R.
- the end of the conductive layer 112R is located inside the end of the conductive layer 129R. That is, the end of the conductive layer 126R is located on the conductive layer 112R.
- the end of the conductive layer 129R is located on the conductive layer 112R.
- the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 126R are covered with a conductive layer 129R.
- the conductive layer 112R is not particularly limited in its transparency and reflectivity to visible light.
- a conductive layer that transmits visible light or a conductive layer that reflects visible light can be used as the conductive layer 112R.
- an oxide conductive layer can be used as the conductive layer 112R.
- an In--Si--Sn oxide also referred to as ITSO
- ITSO In--Si--Sn oxide
- the conductive layer 112R may have a stacked-layer structure of a conductive layer that transmits visible light and a reflective conductive layer over the conductive layer.
- a material that has high adhesion to the formation surface of the conductive layer 112R here, the insulating layer 235. Accordingly, peeling of the conductive layer 112R can be suppressed.
- a conductive layer reflective to visible light can be used for the conductive layer 126R.
- the conductive layer 126R may have a layered structure of a conductive layer that transmits visible light and a reflective conductive layer over the conductive layer.
- a material that can be applied to the conductive layer 112R can be applied to the conductive layer 126R.
- a laminated structure of In—Si—Sn oxide (ITSO) and an alloy of silver, palladium, and copper (APC) on the In—Si—Sn oxide (ITSO) is preferably used as the conductive layer 126R. be able to.
- a material that can be applied to the conductive layer 112R can be applied to the conductive layer 129R.
- a conductive layer that is transparent to visible light can be used.
- In--Si--Sn oxide (ITSO) can be used as the conductive layer 129R.
- a material that is easily oxidized is used for the conductive layer 126R
- a material that is difficult to be oxidized is used for the conductive layer 129R
- oxidation of the conductive layer 129R can be suppressed.
- In-Si-Sn oxide (ITSO) can be preferably used for the conductive layer 126R. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the oxidation of the conductive layer 126R and suppress the deposition of silver.
- the structure of the pixel electrode 111 that can be applied to the display device which is one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the structure of the pixel electrode 111 shown in FIG.
- Conductive layer 112G, conductive layer 126G, and conductive layer 129G in light emitting device 130G and conductive layer 112B, conductive layer 126B, and conductive layer 129B in light emitting device 130B refer to conductive layer 112R, conductive layer 126R, and conductive layer 126R in light emitting device 130R. Since it is the same as the layer 129R, detailed description is omitted.
- the conductive layer 112R, the conductive layer 112G, and the conductive layer 112B are formed so as to cover the openings 193R, 193G, and 193B provided in the insulating layer 235.
- a layer 128 is embedded in the recesses of the conductive layers 112R, 112G, and 112B.
- the layer 128 has a function of flattening the concave portions of the conductive layers 112R, 112G, and 112B.
- a conductive layer 126R, a conductive layer 126G, and a conductive layer 126B electrically connected to the conductive layer 112R, the conductive layer 112G, and the conductive layer 112B are formed over the conductive layer 112R, the conductive layer 112G, the conductive layer 112B, and the layer 128. is provided. Therefore, regions overlapping with the recesses of the conductive layers 112R, 112G, and 112B also function as light-emitting regions, so that the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased.
- the conductivity of the layer 128 is not particularly limited, and the layer 128 may be an insulating layer or a conductive layer.
- Various inorganic insulating materials, organic insulating materials, and conductive materials can be used as appropriate for layer 128 .
- layer 128 is preferably formed using an insulating material, and particularly preferably formed using an organic insulating material.
- an organic insulating material that can be used for the insulating layer 127 described above can be applied.
- the layer 128 when the layer 128 is a conductive layer, the layer 128 can function as part of the pixel electrode.
- the top surface of the conductive layer 112R and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 129R are covered with the layer 113R.
- the top surface of conductive layer 112G and the top and sides of conductive layer 129G are covered by layer 113G
- the top surface of conductive layer 126B and the top and sides of conductive layer 129B are covered by layer 113B. . Therefore, since the entire region where the conductive layer 126R, the conductive layer 126G, and the conductive layer 126B are provided can be used as the light-emitting regions of the light-emitting device 130R, the light-emitting device 130G, and the light-emitting device 130B, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be reduced. can be enhanced.
- Each end of the pixel electrode 111R, the pixel electrode 111G, and the pixel electrode 111B preferably has a tapered shape. Specifically, it is preferable that each end of the pixel electrode 111R, the pixel electrode 111G, and the pixel electrode 111B has a taper shape with a taper angle of less than 90°.
- the coverage of the EL layer provided along the top surface and the side surface of the pixel electrode 111R, the pixel electrode 111G, and the pixel electrode 111B is enhanced. be able to.
- a part of the insulating layer 235 may be removed when forming the pixel electrode 111R, the pixel electrode 111G, and the pixel electrode 111B.
- the insulating layer 235 may have recesses in regions that do not overlap with any of the pixel electrodes 111R, 111G, and 111B.
- a portion of the insulating layer 235 may be removed when forming the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B.
- FIG. 2 shows an example in which the insulating layer 235 has recesses in regions that do not overlap with any of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B.
- insulating layer also referred to as a partition, bank, or spacer
- no insulating layer is provided between the pixel electrode 111G and the layer 113G to cover the edge of the upper surface of the pixel electrode 111G. Therefore, the interval between adjacent light emitting devices can be reduced. Therefore, a high-definition or high-resolution display device can be obtained. Moreover, a mask for forming the insulating layer is not required, and the manufacturing cost of the display device can be reduced.
- the viewing angle dependency of the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be reduced. By reducing the viewing angle dependency, it is possible to improve the visibility of the image on the display device.
- the viewing angle (the maximum angle at which a constant contrast ratio is maintained when the screen is viewed obliquely) is 100° or more and less than 180°, preferably 150°. It can be in the range of 170° or more. It should be noted that the viewing angle described above can be applied to each of the vertical and horizontal directions.
- a single structure (a structure having only one light emitting unit) or a tandem structure (a structure having a plurality of light emitting units) may be applied to the light emitting device of this embodiment.
- the light-emitting unit has at least one light-emitting layer.
- the light emitting device 130R emits red (R) light
- the light emitting device 130G emits green (G) light
- the light emitting device 130B emits blue (B) light.
- Layer 113R, layer 113G, and layer 113B have at least a light-emitting layer.
- Layer 113R has a light-emitting layer that emits red light
- layer 113G has a light-emitting layer that emits green light
- layer 113B has a light-emitting layer that emits blue light.
- layer 113R has a luminescent material that emits red light
- layer 113G has a luminescent material that emits green light
- layer 113B has a luminescent material that emits blue light.
- the layer 113R has a structure having a plurality of light-emitting units that emit red light
- the layer 113G has a structure that has a plurality of light-emitting units that emit green light
- the layer 113B has a structure having blue light-emitting units. It is preferable that the structure has a plurality of light-emitting units that emit light of .
- a charge generating layer is preferably provided between each light emitting unit.
- Layers 113R, 113G, and 113B each comprise one or more of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a hole blocking layer, a charge generation layer, an electron blocking layer, an electron transport layer, and an electron injection layer. may have.
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B may each have a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light emitting layer, and an electron transport layer in this order. Moreover, you may have an electron block layer between a hole transport layer and a light emitting layer. Moreover, you may have a hole blocking layer between an electron carrying layer and a light emitting layer. Moreover, you may have an electron injection layer on an electron carrying layer.
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B may each have an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a light emitting layer, and a hole transport layer in this order. Moreover, you may have a hole blocking layer between an electron carrying layer and a light emitting layer. Moreover, you may have an electron block layer between a hole transport layer and a light emitting layer. Also, a hole injection layer may be provided on the hole transport layer.
- each of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B preferably has a light-emitting layer and a carrier-transporting layer (electron-transporting layer or hole-transporting layer) on the light-emitting layer.
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B each preferably have a light emitting layer and a carrier blocking layer (hole blocking layer or electron blocking layer) over the light emitting layer.
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B each preferably have a light emitting layer, a carrier blocking layer over the light emitting layer, and a carrier transport layer over the carrier blocking layer.
- the surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B are exposed during the manufacturing process of the display device; Exposure can be suppressed, and damage to the light-emitting layer can be reduced. This can improve the reliability of the light emitting device.
- the heat resistance temperature of the compounds contained in the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B is preferably 100° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower, preferably 120° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower, and more preferably 140° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower.
- the glass transition point (Tg) of these compounds is preferably 100° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower, preferably 120° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower, and more preferably 140° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower.
- the heat resistance temperature of the functional layer provided on the light emitting layer is high. Further, it is more preferable that the functional layer provided in contact with the light-emitting layer has a high heat resistance temperature. Since the functional layer has high heat resistance, the light-emitting layer can be effectively protected, and damage to the light-emitting layer can be reduced.
- the heat-resistant temperature of the light-emitting layer is high. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light-emitting layer from being damaged by heating, thereby reducing the light-emitting efficiency and shortening the life of the light-emitting layer.
- the light-emitting layer includes a light-emitting substance (also called a light-emitting material, a light-emitting organic compound, or a guest material) and an organic compound (also called a host material). Since the light-emitting layer contains more organic compounds than light-emitting substances, the Tg of the organic compound can be used as an index of the heat resistance temperature of the light-emitting layer.
- a light-emitting substance also called a light-emitting material, a light-emitting organic compound, or a guest material
- an organic compound also called a host material
- Layers 113R, 113G, and 113B may, for example, have a first light emitting unit, a charge generating layer on the first light emitting unit, and a second light emitting unit on the charge generating layer. .
- the second light-emitting unit preferably has a light-emitting layer and a carrier-transporting layer (electron-transporting layer or hole-transporting layer) on the light-emitting layer.
- the second light emitting unit preferably has a light emitting layer and a carrier blocking layer (hole blocking layer or electron blocking layer) on the light emitting layer.
- the second light-emitting unit preferably has a light-emitting layer, a carrier-blocking layer on the light-emitting layer, and a carrier-transporting layer on the carrier-blocking layer.
- the light-emitting unit provided in the uppermost layer preferably has a light-emitting layer and one or both of a carrier transport layer and a carrier block layer over the light-emitting layer.
- the common layer 114 has, for example, an electron injection layer or a hole injection layer.
- the common layer 114 may have a laminate of an electron transport layer and an electron injection layer, or may have a laminate of a hole transport layer and a hole injection layer.
- Common layer 114 is shared by light emitting device 130R, light emitting device 130G, and light emitting device 130B.
- An insulating layer 125 and an insulating layer 127 on the insulating layer 125 are provided in the region between the adjacent light emitting devices 130 .
- a plurality of cross sections of the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 are shown in FIG. 2 and the like, when the display device 100 is viewed from above, the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 are each connected to one.
- the display device 100 can be configured to have one insulating layer 125 and one insulating layer 127, for example.
- the display device 100 may have a plurality of insulating layers 125 separated from each other, and may have a plurality of insulating layers 127 separated from each other.
- FIG. 2 and the like show an example in which the edge of the layer 113R is located outside the edge of the pixel electrode 111R.
- the pixel electrode 111R and the layer 113R will be described as an example, the same applies to the pixel electrode 111G and the layer 113G and the pixel electrode 111B and the layer 113B.
- FIG. 5A An enlarged view of the light emitting device 130R, the transistor 205R, and the vicinity thereof shown in FIG. 2 is shown in FIG. 5A.
- a top view of layer 113R is shown in FIG. 5B.
- the layer 113R is formed to cover the edge of the pixel electrode 111R. With such a structure, the entire upper surface of the pixel electrode can be used as a light-emitting region, and the edge of the island-shaped EL layer is located inside the edge of the pixel electrode. It becomes easy to increase the rate.
- the pixel electrode 111 By covering the side surface of the pixel electrode 111 with the EL layer, contact between the pixel electrode 111 and the common electrode 115 can be suppressed, so short-circuiting of the light emitting device 130 can be suppressed.
- the distance between the light emitting region of the EL layer (that is, the region overlapping with the pixel electrode 111) and the edge of the EL layer can be increased. Since the edges of the EL layer may be damaged by processing, the reliability of the light-emitting device 130 may be improved by using a region away from the edges of the EL layer as the light-emitting region.
- Each of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B preferably has a first region 113_1, which is a light emitting region, and a second region 113_2 outside the first region 113_1, as shown in FIG. 5B. .
- the first region 113_1 is located between the pixel electrode 111R and the common electrode 115 in FIG. 5A.
- the first region 113_1 is a portion of the layer 113R that is in contact with the pixel electrode 111R and overlaps with the common electrode 115 with the common layer 114 interposed therebetween.
- the first region 113_1 is covered with a mask layer during the manufacturing process of the display device to reduce damage received. Therefore, it is possible to realize a light-emitting device with high luminous efficiency and long life.
- the second region 113_2 includes the end portion of the EL layer and its vicinity, and includes a portion that may be damaged due to exposure to plasma or the like during the manufacturing process of the display device.
- the second area can be called a dummy area.
- the arrow indicates the width L1 of the first region 113_1, which is the light emitting region in the layer 113R.
- Widths L2 and L3 of the second region 113_2, which is a dummy region in the layer 113R, are indicated by arrows.
- the second region 113_2 is provided so as to surround the first region 113_1. Therefore, in cross-sectional views such as FIG. You can check with The widths L1 to L3 can be confirmed by a cross-sectional observation image or the like.
- a second region 113_2 is a portion where at least one of the mask layer 118R, the mask layer 119R, the insulating layer 125, and the insulating layer 127 overlaps in the layer 113R.
- the width L2 and the width L3 of the second region 113_2 are each preferably 1 nm or more, more preferably 5 nm or more, further preferably 50 nm or more, further preferably 100 nm or more.
- each of the width L2 and the width L3 of the second region 113_2 is preferably 50% or less of the width L1 of the first region 113_1, more preferably 40% or less, further preferably 30% or less, and further preferably 20% or less. % or less, more preferably 10% or less.
- the width L2 and the width L3 of the second region 113_2 are each preferably 500 nm or less, more preferably 300 nm or less, and further 200 nm or less. is preferred, and 150 nm or less is more preferred.
- the first region (light emitting region) is a region where EL (Electroluminescence) light emission is obtained.
- both the first region (light emitting region) and the second region (dummy region) are regions where PL (Photoluminescence) light emission can be obtained. From these facts, it can be said that the first region and the second region can be distinguished by confirming EL emission and PL emission.
- the common electrode 115 is shared by the light emitting device 130R, the light emitting device 130G, and the light emitting device 130B.
- a common electrode 115 shared by a plurality of light emitting devices is electrically connected to the conductive layer 123 provided in the connection portion 140 (see FIG. 2).
- the conductive layer 123 is preferably formed using the same material and in the same process as the pixel electrodes 111R, 111G, and 111B.
- the conductive layer 123 can have a stacked-layer structure of a conductive layer 112p, a conductive layer 126p over the conductive layer 112p, and a conductive layer 129p over the conductive layer 126p.
- the conductive layer 112p can be formed in the same step as the conductive layers 112R, 112G, and 112B.
- the conductive layer 126p can be formed in the same step as the conductive layers 126R, 126G, and 126B.
- the conductive layer 129p can be formed in the same step as the conductive layers 129R, 129G, and 129B.
- FIG. 2 shows a configuration in which the thickness of the conductive layer 129p is different from the thicknesses of the conductive layers 129R, 129G, and 129B.
- the thickness of the conductive layer 129p, the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 129G, and the conductive layer 129B may be varied according to the resistivity of the materials used.
- the conductive layers 129p may be formed in steps different from those of the conductive layers 129R, 129G, and 129B.
- part of the step of forming the conductive layer 129p and the step of forming the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 129G, and the conductive layer 129B may be shared.
- the common layer 114 may not be provided in the connecting portion 140 .
- FIG. 2 shows a structure in which the common electrode 115 is provided over the conductive layer 123 .
- the common layer 114 may be provided over the conductive layer 123 and the conductive layer 123 and the common electrode 115 may be electrically connected to each other through the common layer 114 .
- a mask also referred to as an area mask or a rough metal mask to be distinguished from a fine metal mask
- the region where the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are formed is defined. can change.
- mask layers 118R and 119R are positioned on layer 113R of light emitting device 130R, and mask layers 118G and 119G are positioned on layer 113G of light emitting device 130G to emit light.
- Mask layer 118B and mask layer 119B are located over layer 113B of device 130B.
- the mask layers 118 and 119 are provided so as to surround the first region 113_1 (light emitting region). In other words, the mask layer has openings in portions overlapping the light emitting regions.
- the top surface shape of the mask layer matches, roughly matches, or is similar to the second region 113_2.
- the mask layer 118R and the mask layer 119R are part of the remaining mask layer provided on the layer 113R when forming the layer 113R.
- the mask layers 118G and 119G are part of the mask layers that were provided when the layer 113G was formed, and the mask layers 118B and 119B are part of the mask layers that were provided when the layer 113B was formed. .
- part of the mask layer used to protect the EL layer may remain during manufacturing.
- any two or all of the mask layer 118R, the mask layer 118G, and the mask layer 118B may be used.
- any two or all of the mask layers 119R, 119G, and 119B may be made of the same material or may be made of different materials.
- the mask layer 118R, the mask layer 118G, and the mask layer 118B may be collectively referred to as the mask layer 118 in some cases.
- the mask layer 119R, the mask layer 119G, and the mask layer 119B may be collectively referred to as the mask layer 119 in some cases.
- one end of the mask layer 118R and one end of the mask layer 119R are aligned with the end of the layer 113R. Aligned or substantially aligned, the other end of the mask layer 118R and the other end of the mask layer 119R (the light emitting region side end, the inner end) are located on the layer 113R.
- the other end of the mask layer 118R and the other end of the mask layer 119R preferably overlap the layer 113R and the pixel electrode 111R. In this case, the other end of the mask layer 118R and the other end of the mask layer 119R are likely to be formed on the flat or substantially flat surface of the layer 113R.
- the mask layer 118G, the mask layer 119G, the mask layer 118B, and the mask layer 119B are also the same.
- the mask layers 118 and 119 remain, for example, between the insulating layer 125 and the upper surface of the island-shaped EL layer (the layer 113R, the layer 113G, or the layer 113B).
- the ends are aligned or substantially aligned, and when the top surface shapes are matched or substantially matched, at least part of the outline overlaps between the stacked layers when viewed from the top.
- the upper layer and the lower layer may be processed with the same mask pattern, or partially with the same mask pattern.
- the outlines do not overlap, and the top layer may be located inside the bottom layer, or the top layer may be located outside the bottom layer, and in this case also the edges are roughly aligned, or the shape of the top surface are said to roughly match.
- Each side surface of the layer 113R, the layer 113G, and the layer 113B is covered with an insulating layer 125.
- the insulating layer 127 overlaps the side surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B with the insulating layer 125 interposed therebetween.
- a portion of the upper surface of each of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B is covered with a mask layer 118.
- a mask layer 119 is provided over the mask layer 118 .
- the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 partially overlap the upper surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B with the mask layers 118 and 119 interposed therebetween.
- the common layer 114 (or The common electrode 115) is prevented from being in contact with the side surfaces of the pixel electrode 111R, pixel electrode 111G, pixel electrode 111B, layer 113R, layer 113G, and layer 113B, and short circuit of the light emitting device can be suppressed. This can improve the reliability of the light emitting device.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- Layers 113R, 113G, and 113B may have different thicknesses.
- the insulating layer 125 is preferably in contact with the side surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B. With the structure in which the insulating layer 125 is in contact with the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B, peeling of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B can be prevented. Adhesion between the insulating layer 125 and the layer 113B, the layer 113G, or the layer 113R has the effect of fixing or adhering the adjacent layer 113B or the like by the insulating layer 125 . This can improve the reliability of the light emitting device. Moreover, the production yield of the light-emitting device can be increased.
- the insulating layers 125 and 127 cover part of the top surface and side surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B, so that peeling of the EL layer can be further prevented. , the reliability of the light-emitting device can be enhanced. Moreover, the manufacturing yield of the light-emitting device can be further increased.
- FIG. 2 shows an example in which a laminated structure of a layer 113R, a mask layer 118R, a mask layer 119R, an insulating layer 125, and an insulating layer 127 is provided on the edge of the pixel electrode 111R.
- a layered structure of a layer 113G, a mask layer 118G, a mask layer 119G, an insulating layer 125, and an insulating layer 127 is provided on the edge of the pixel electrode 111G, and layers 113B, 113B and 127 are provided on the edge of the pixel electrode 111B.
- a layered structure of mask layer 118B, mask layer 119B, insulating layer 125, and insulating layer 127 is provided.
- FIG. 2 shows a configuration in which the edge of the pixel electrode 111R is covered with the layer 113R, and the insulating layer 125 is in contact with the side surface of the layer 113R.
- the edge of the pixel electrode 111G is covered with the layer 113G
- the edge of the pixel electrode 111B is covered with the layer 113B
- the insulating layer 125 is in contact with the side of the layer 113G and the side of the layer 113B.
- the insulating layer 127 is provided on the insulating layer 125 so as to fill the recesses formed in the insulating layer 125 .
- the insulating layer 127 can overlap with part of the top surface and side surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B with the insulating layer 125 interposed therebetween.
- the insulating layer 127 preferably covers at least part of the side surface of the insulating layer 125 .
- the space between the adjacent island-shaped layers can be filled; It is possible to reduce unevenness with a large difference in height and make the surface more flat. Therefore, coverage of the carrier injection layer, the common electrode, and the like can be improved.
- the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are provided on the layers 113R, 113G, 113B, the mask layers 118, 119, the insulating layers 125 and 127.
- a region where the pixel electrode and the island-shaped EL layer are provided, a region where the pixel electrode and the island-shaped EL layer are not provided (region between the light emitting devices) There is a step due to Since the display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes the insulating layer 125 and the insulating layer 127 , the step can be reduced, and coverage with the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress poor connection due to disconnection. In addition, it is possible to prevent the film thickness of the common electrode 115 from locally thinning due to the steps, and the increase in electrical resistance.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 preferably has a more flat shape, but may have a convex portion, a convex curved surface, a concave curved surface, or a concave portion.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 preferably has a convex shape with high flatness.
- the insulating layer 125 can be an insulating layer containing an inorganic material.
- an inorganic insulating film such as an oxide insulating film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, or a nitride oxide insulating film can be used, for example.
- the insulating layer 125 may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure.
- the oxide insulating film includes a silicon oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, an indium gallium zinc oxide film, a gallium oxide film, a germanium oxide film, an yttrium oxide film, a zirconium oxide film, a lanthanum oxide film, a neodymium oxide film, and an oxide film.
- a hafnium film, a tantalum oxide film, and the like are included.
- the nitride insulating film include a silicon nitride film and an aluminum nitride film.
- Examples of the oxynitride insulating film include a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, and the like.
- the nitride oxide insulating film examples include a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride oxide film, and the like.
- aluminum oxide is preferable because it has a high etching selectivity with respect to the EL layer and has a function of protecting the EL layer during formation of the insulating layer 127 described later.
- an inorganic insulating film such as an aluminum oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, or a silicon oxide film formed by an atomic layer deposition (ALD) method to the insulating layer 125, there are few pinholes and the EL layer can be used.
- An insulating layer 125 having an excellent protective function can be formed.
- the insulating layer 125 may have a layered structure of a film formed by an ALD method and a film formed by a sputtering method.
- the insulating layer 125 may have a laminated structure of, for example, an aluminum oxide film formed by ALD and a silicon nitride film formed by sputtering.
- oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen. point to the material.
- silicon oxynitride refers to a material whose composition contains more oxygen than nitrogen
- silicon nitride oxide refers to a material whose composition contains more nitrogen than oxygen. indicates
- the insulating layer 125 preferably functions as a barrier insulating layer against at least one of water and oxygen. Further, the insulating layer 125 preferably has a function of suppressing diffusion of at least one of water and oxygen. Further, the insulating layer 125 preferably has a function of capturing or fixing at least one of water and oxygen (also referred to as gettering).
- a barrier insulating layer indicates an insulating layer having barrier properties.
- the barrier property is defined as a function of suppressing diffusion of a corresponding substance (also referred to as low permeability).
- the corresponding substance has a function of capturing or fixing (also called gettering).
- the insulating layer 125 has a function as a barrier insulating layer or a gettering function to suppress entry of impurities (typically, at least one of water and oxygen) that can diffuse into each light-emitting device from the outside. is possible. With such a structure, a highly reliable light-emitting device and a highly reliable display device can be provided.
- impurities typically, at least one of water and oxygen
- the insulating layer 125 preferably has a low impurity concentration. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the EL layer due to entry of impurities from the insulating layer 125 into the EL layer. In addition, by reducing the impurity concentration in the insulating layer 125, the barrier property against at least one of water and oxygen can be improved.
- the insulating layer 125 preferably has a sufficiently low hydrogen concentration or carbon concentration, or preferably both.
- the same material can be used for the insulating layer 125 and the mask layers 118B, 118G, and 118R.
- the boundary between any one of the mask layers 118B, 118G, and 118R and the insulating layer 125 may become unclear and cannot be distinguished.
- the insulating layer 127 provided on the insulating layer 125 has a function of flattening unevenness with a large height difference of the insulating layer 125 formed between adjacent light emitting devices. In other words, the presence of the insulating layer 127 has the effect of improving the flatness of the surface on which the common electrode 115 is formed.
- An insulating layer containing an organic material can be suitably used as the insulating layer 127 .
- the organic material it is preferable to use a photosensitive organic resin, for example, it is preferable to use a photosensitive resin composition containing an acrylic resin.
- acrylic resin does not only refer to polymethacrylate esters or methacrylic resins, but may refer to all acrylic polymers in a broad sense.
- Acrylic resin polyimide resin, epoxy resin, imide resin, polyamide resin, polyimideamide resin, silicone resin, siloxane resin, benzocyclobutene resin, phenol resin, and precursors of these resins may be used as the insulating layer 127. good.
- an organic material such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl butyral, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol, polyglycerin, pullulan, water-soluble cellulose, or alcohol-soluble polyamide resin may be used as the insulating layer 127 .
- a photoresist may be used as the photosensitive resin.
- the photosensitive organic resin either a positive material or a negative material may be used.
- a material that absorbs visible light may be used for the insulating layer 127 . Since the insulating layer 127 absorbs light emitted from the light emitting device, leakage of light (stray light) from the light emitting device to an adjacent light emitting device via the insulating layer 127 can be suppressed. Thereby, the display quality of the display device can be improved. In addition, since the display quality can be improved without using a polarizing plate for the display device, the weight and thickness of the display device can be reduced.
- Materials that absorb visible light include materials containing pigments such as black, materials containing dyes, light-absorbing resin materials (e.g., polyimide), and resin materials that can be used for color filters (color filter materials ).
- resin materials that can be used for color filters color filter materials
- by mixing color filter materials of three or more colors it is possible to obtain a black or nearly black resin layer.
- FIG. 6A shows an enlarged cross-sectional view of a region including insulating layer 127 and its periphery between light emitting device 130R and light emitting device 130G.
- the insulating layer 127 between the light emitting device 130R and the light emitting device 130G will be described as an example. The same can be said for the insulating layer 127 and the like.
- a layer 113R is provided over the pixel electrode 111R and a layer 113G is provided over the pixel electrode 111G.
- a mask layer 118R is provided in contact with a portion of the top surface of layer 113R, and a mask layer 118G is provided in contact with a portion of the top surface of layer 113G.
- An insulating layer 125 is provided in contact with the top and side surfaces of the mask layer 118R, the side surfaces of the layer 113R, the top surface of the insulating layer 235, the top and side surfaces of the mask layer 118G, and the side surfaces of the layer 113G.
- the insulating layer 125 also covers part of the top surface of the layer 113R and part of the top surface of the layer 113G.
- An insulating layer 127 is provided in contact with the upper surface of the insulating layer 125 .
- the insulating layer 127 overlaps part of the top surface and side surfaces of the layer 113R and part of the top surface and side surfaces of the layer 113G with the insulating layer 125 interposed therebetween, and is in contact with at least part of the side surface of the insulating layer 125 .
- a common layer 114 is provided over layer 113R, mask layer 118R, layer 113G, mask layer 118G, insulating layer 125, and insulating layer 127, and common electrode 115 is provided on common layer 114.
- the insulating layer 127 is formed in the region between the two island-shaped EL layers (for example, the region between the layers 113R and 113G in FIG. 6A). At this time, at least part of the insulating layer 127 is the side edge of one EL layer (eg, the layer 113R in FIG. 6A) and the side edge of the other EL layer (eg, the layer 113G in FIG. 6A). It will be placed in a position sandwiched between parts. By providing such an insulating layer 127, the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 formed over the island-shaped EL layer and the insulating layer 127 are divided and locally thin. can be prevented.
- the end portion of the insulating layer 127 is preferably tapered.
- the angle between the side surface of the insulating layer 127 and the surface on which the insulating layer 127 is formed is preferably less than 90°, more preferably 60° or less, more preferably 45° or less, further preferably 20° or less.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 preferably has a convex curved shape.
- the convex curved surface shape of the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 is preferably a shape that gently swells toward the center. Further, it is preferable that the convex curved surface portion in the central portion of the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 has a shape that is continuously connected to the tapered portion at the end portion.
- the end of the insulating layer 125 preferably has a tapered shape.
- the angle formed by the side surface of the insulating layer 125 and the surface on which the insulating layer 125 is formed is preferably less than 90°, more preferably 60° or less, more preferably 45° or less, further preferably 20° or less.
- the end of the mask layer 118R is preferably tapered.
- the angle between the side surface of the mask layer 118R and the surface on which the mask layer 118R is formed is preferably less than 90°, more preferably 60° or less, more preferably 45° or less, further preferably 20° or less.
- the mask layers 118G and 118B preferably have tapered end portions, and the angle formed by the side surfaces of these layers and the surface to be formed is preferably within the range described above.
- the end of the mask layer 119R preferably has a tapered shape.
- the angle between the side surface of the mask layer 119R and the surface on which the mask layer 119R is formed is preferably less than 90°, more preferably 60° or less, further preferably 45° or less, further preferably 20° or less.
- the mask layers 119G and 119B preferably have tapered end portions, and the angle formed by the side surfaces of these layers and the surface to be formed is preferably within the range described above.
- the coverage of the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 provided on the mask layer 118G and the mask layer 119R is improved. can be done.
- the end of the mask layer 118R and the end of the mask layer 119R are preferably located outside the end of the insulating layer 125, respectively. Thereby, unevenness of the surface on which the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are formed can be reduced, and coverage of the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 can be improved.
- the insulating layer 127 may cover at least part of the side surface of the insulating layer 125, the side surface of the mask layer 118R, the side surface of the mask layer 119R, the side surface of the mask layer 118G, and the side surface of the mask layer 119G.
- FIG. 6B shows a configuration in which the insulating layer 127 covers the side surface of the insulating layer 125, part of the side surface of the mask layer 118R, the mask layer 119R, part of the side surface of the mask layer 118G, and the side surface of the mask layer 119G.
- the ends of the insulating layer 127 are preferably located outside the ends of the insulating layer 125 . Thereby, unevenness of the surface on which the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are formed can be reduced, and coverage of the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 can be improved.
- FIG. 7A shows an example in which the insulating layer 127 covers the entire side surface of the insulating layer 125, the entire side surface of the mask layer 118R, the entire side surface of the mask layer 119R, the entire side surface of the mask layer 118G, and the entire side surface of the mask layer 119G. This is preferable because unevenness of the surface on which the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are formed can be further reduced. Also, as shown in FIG. 7A, insulating layer 127 may contact layer 113R and layer 113G.
- FIG. 7B shows an example in which the insulating layer 127 has a concave surface shape (also referred to as a constricted portion, recess, dent, or depression) on the side surface.
- a concave surface shape also referred to as a constricted portion, recess, dent, or depression
- the side surface of the insulating layer 127 may have a concave curved shape.
- one end of the insulating layer 127 overlaps the upper surface of the pixel electrode 111R and the other end of the insulating layer 127 overlaps the upper surface of the pixel electrode 111G.
- the end portion of the insulating layer 127 can be formed over flat or substantially flat regions of the layers 113R and 113G.
- the insulating layer 127 does not have to overlap the upper surface of the pixel electrode 111 .
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 may have a flat portion.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 may have a concave surface shape.
- the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 has a shape that gently bulges toward the center, that is, a convex surface, and a shape that is depressed at and near the center, that is, a concave surface.
- the convex curved surface portion of the upper surface of the insulating layer 127 has a shape that is continuously connected to the tapered portion of the end portion. Even if the insulating layer 127 has such a shape, the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 can be formed on the entire insulating layer 127 with good coverage.
- a method of exposing using a multi-tone mask can be applied to provide a structure having a concave curved surface in the central portion of the insulating layer 127 as shown in FIG. 8B.
- a multi-tone mask is a mask that can perform exposure at three exposure levels, an exposed portion, an intermediate exposed portion, and an unexposed portion, and is an exposure mask in which transmitted light has a plurality of intensities.
- the insulating layer 127 having a plurality of (typically two) thickness regions can be formed with one photomask (single exposure and development steps).
- the method for forming the concave curved surface in the central portion of the insulating layer 127 is not limited to the above.
- an exposed portion and an intermediately exposed portion may be separately manufactured using two photomasks.
- the viscosity of the resin material used for the insulating layer 127 may be adjusted.
- the viscosity of the material used for the insulating layer 127 may be 10 cP or less, preferably 1 cP or more and 5 cP or less.
- the central concave curved surface of the insulating layer 127 does not necessarily have to be continuous, and may be discontinued between adjacent light emitting devices. In this case, a part of the insulating layer 127 disappears at the central portion of the insulating layer 127 shown in FIG. 8B, and the surface of the insulating layer 125 is exposed. In the case of such a structure, the shape may be such that the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 can be covered.
- insulating layer 127, insulating layer 125, masking layer 118R, masking layer 118G, masking layer 119R, and masking layer 119G provide a flat or substantially planar region of layer 113R to a planar or substantially planar region of layer 113G.
- the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 can be formed with high coverage up to a flat region. In addition, it is possible to prevent the formation of portions where the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are divided and portions where the film thickness is locally thin are formed.
- the display quality of the display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be improved.
- a protective layer 131 is preferably provided on the light emitting device 130R, the light emitting device 130G, and the light emitting device 130B. By providing the protective layer 131, the reliability of the light emitting device 130 can be improved.
- the protective layer 131 may have a single layer structure or a laminated structure of two or more layers.
- the conductivity of the protective layer 131 does not matter. At least one of an insulating film, a semiconductor film, and a conductive film can be used as the protective layer 131 .
- the protective layer 131 By including an inorganic film in the protective layer 131, it is possible to suppress oxidation of the common electrode 115 and entry of impurities (moisture, oxygen, etc.) into the light emitting device. Therefore, deterioration of the light emitting device is suppressed, and the reliability of the display device can be improved.
- the protective layer 131 inorganic insulating films such as oxide insulating films, nitride insulating films, oxynitride insulating films, and oxynitride insulating films can be used. Specific examples of these inorganic insulating films are as described for the insulating layer 125 .
- the protective layer 131 preferably includes a nitride insulating film or a nitride oxide insulating film, and more preferably includes a nitride insulating film.
- the protective layer 131 includes In—Sn oxide (also referred to as ITO), In—Zn oxide, Ga—Zn oxide, Al—Zn oxide, or indium gallium zinc oxide (In—Ga—Zn oxide, An inorganic film containing IGZO) or the like can also be used.
- the inorganic film preferably has a high resistance, and specifically, preferably has a higher resistance than the common electrode 115 .
- the inorganic film may further contain nitrogen.
- the protective layer 131 When the light emitted from the light-emitting device is taken out through the protective layer 131, the protective layer 131 preferably has high transparency to visible light.
- the protective layer 131 preferably has high transparency to visible light.
- ITO, IGZO, and aluminum oxide are preferable because they are inorganic materials with high transparency to visible light.
- the protective layer 131 for example, a stacked structure of an aluminum oxide film and a silicon nitride film over the aluminum oxide film, or a stacked structure of an aluminum oxide film and an IGZO film over the aluminum oxide film, or the like can be used. can be done. By using the stacked structure, entry of impurities (such as water and oxygen) into the EL layer can be suppressed.
- impurities such as water and oxygen
- the protective layer 131 may have an organic film.
- protective layer 131 may have both an organic film and an inorganic film.
- organic materials that can be used for the protective layer 131 include organic insulating materials that can be used for the insulating layer 127 .
- the protective layer 131 may have a two-layer structure formed using different film formation methods. Specifically, the first layer of the protective layer 131 may be formed using the ALD method, and the second layer of the protective layer 131 may be formed using the sputtering method.
- a light shielding layer 117 may be provided on the surface of the substrate 120 on the resin layer 122 side.
- the light shielding layer 117 can be provided between the adjacent light emitting devices 130 and at the connecting portion 140 .
- light shielding layer 117 By providing the light shielding layer 117, light emitted from adjacent sub-pixels is blocked and color mixture can be prevented.
- external light can be suppressed from reaching the transistor 205, and deterioration of the transistor 205 can be suppressed. Note that a structure in which the light shielding layer 117 is not provided may be employed.
- optical members can be arranged outside the substrate 120 .
- optical members include polarizing plates, retardation plates, light diffusion layers (diffusion films, etc.), antireflection layers, light collecting films, and the like.
- an antistatic film that suppresses adhesion of dust a water-repellent film that prevents adhesion of dirt, a hard coat film that suppresses the occurrence of scratches due to use, a shock absorption layer, etc. Layers may be arranged.
- DLC diamond-like carbon
- AlO x aluminum oxide
- polyester-based material polycarbonate-based material, or the like
- a material having a high visible light transmittance is preferably used for the surface protective layer.
- Glass, quartz, ceramics, sapphire, resin, metal, alloy, semiconductor, etc. can be used for the substrate 120 .
- a material that transmits the light is used for the substrate on the side from which the light from the light-emitting device is extracted.
- Using a flexible material for the substrate 120 can increase the flexibility of the display device.
- a polarizing plate may be used as the substrate 120 .
- polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyacrylonitrile resins, acrylic resins, polyimide resins, polymethylmethacrylate resins, polycarbonate (PC) resins, polyethersulfone (PES) resins, Polyamide resin (nylon, aramid, etc.), polysiloxane resin, cycloolefin resin, polystyrene resin, polyamideimide resin, polyurethane resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, polypropylene resin, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) resin, ABS A resin, cellulose nanofiber, or the like can be used.
- glass having a thickness that is flexible may be used.
- a substrate having high optical isotropy has small birefringence (it can be said that the amount of birefringence is small).
- the absolute value of the retardation (retardation) value of the substrate with high optical isotropy is preferably 30 nm or less, more preferably 20 nm or less, and even more preferably 10 nm or less.
- Films with high optical isotropy include triacetyl cellulose (TAC, also called cellulose triacetate) films, cycloolefin polymer (COP) films, cycloolefin copolymer (COC) films, and acrylic films.
- TAC triacetyl cellulose
- COP cycloolefin polymer
- COC cycloolefin copolymer
- a film having a low water absorption rate as the substrate.
- various curable adhesives such as photocurable adhesives such as ultraviolet curable adhesives, reaction curable adhesives, thermosetting adhesives, and anaerobic adhesives can be used.
- These adhesives include epoxy resins, acrylic resins, silicone resins, phenol resins, polyimide resins, imide resins, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resins, PVB (polyvinyl butyral) resins, EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resins, and the like.
- a material with low moisture permeability such as epoxy resin is preferable.
- a two-liquid mixed type resin may be used.
- an adhesive sheet or the like may be used.
- FIGS. 9A and 9B A configuration example different from the pixel electrode 111R shown in FIG. 2 and the like is shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.
- the ends of the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 126R, and the conductive layer 112R are aligned or substantially aligned.
- the layer 113R contacts the sides of the conductive layer 129R, the sides of the conductive layer 126R, and the sides of the conductive layer 112R.
- a resist mask is formed on the substrate, and the first conductive film, the second conductive film, and the third conductive film are processed using the resist mask to form the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 126R, and the conductive layer 112R.
- the process can be simplified. .
- the conductive layer 129R and the conductive layer 126R are covered with the conductive layer 112R.
- the edges of the conductive layer 129R are aligned or substantially aligned with the edges of the conductive layer 126R.
- the conductive layer 112R is in contact with the side surfaces of the conductive layer 129R and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 126R.
- the layer 113R contacts the side surfaces of the conductive layer 129R and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 112R.
- a resist mask is formed over the second conductive film.
- a conductive layer 129R and a conductive layer 126R are formed.
- a third conductive film to be the conductive layer 112R is formed so as to cover the conductive layers 129R and 126R, and the third conductive film is processed, whereby the conductive layer 112R can be formed. .
- FIG. 9A and the like show a configuration in which the upper surface of the layer 128 has a shape in which the center and the vicinity thereof are swollen in a cross-sectional view, that is, a shape having a convex curved surface, but the shape of the layer 128 is not particularly limited.
- the upper surface of the layer 128 can be configured to have a shape in which the center and the vicinity thereof are depressed in a cross-sectional view, that is, a shape having a concave curved surface.
- the top surface of layer 128 may have one or both of convex and concave surfaces.
- the number of convex curved surfaces and concave curved surfaces that the upper surface of the layer 128 has is not limited, and may be one or more.
- the height of the top surface of the layer 128 and the height of the top surface of the conductive layer 112R may match or substantially match, or may differ from each other.
- the height of the top surface of layer 128 may be lower or higher than the height of the top surface of conductive layer 112R.
- 10A to 13 show examples different from the transistor 205 shown in FIG. 2 and the like.
- the transistors 205R shown in FIGS. 10A to 11A mainly differ from the transistors 205 shown in FIG.
- the edge of the insulating layer 225 is formed to match or substantially match the edge of the conductive layer 223 . It can be said that the top surface shape of the insulating layer 225 matches or substantially matches that of the conductive layer 223 .
- the insulating layer 225 overlaps with the channel formation region 231i of the semiconductor layer 231 and does not overlap with the low resistance region 231n.
- the insulating layer 225 can be formed, for example, by processing using a resist mask for processing the conductive layer 223 .
- the insulating layer 218 is in contact with the top and side surfaces of the semiconductor layer 231 , the side surfaces of the insulating layer 225 , and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 223 .
- the conductive layers 222a and 222b are electrically connected to the low-resistance regions 231n, respectively.
- the edge of the insulating layer 225 is located on the semiconductor layer 231.
- the edge of the insulating layer 225 is positioned outside the edge of the conductive layer 223 .
- the insulating layer 225 has a portion on the semiconductor layer 231 that protrudes beyond the end of the conductive layer 223 .
- the semiconductor layer 231 has a pair of regions 231l sandwiching a channel forming region 231i and a pair of low resistance regions 231n outside thereof.
- a region 231 l is a region of the semiconductor layer 231 that overlaps with the insulating layer 225 and does not overlap with the conductive layer 223 .
- the region 231l functions as a buffer region for relaxing the drain electric field. Since the region 231l is a region that does not overlap with the conductive layer 223, even when a gate voltage is applied to the conductive layer 223, a channel is hardly formed.
- the region 231l preferably has a higher carrier concentration than the channel formation region 231i. This allows the region 231l to function as an LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region.
- the region 231l is also referred to as a region having a similar or lower resistance, a region having a similar or higher carrier concentration, a region having a similar or higher oxygen defect density, and a region having a similar or higher impurity concentration than the channel forming region 231i. be able to.
- the region 231l is also referred to as a region having a similar or higher resistance, a region having a similar or lower carrier concentration, a region having a similar or lower oxygen defect density, and a region having a similar or lower impurity concentration than the low resistance region 231n. be able to.
- the insulating layer 218 is in contact with the top and side surfaces of the semiconductor layer 231 , the top and side surfaces of the insulating layer 225 , and the top and side surfaces of the conductive layer 223 .
- FIG. 11A shows a configuration in which the conductive layers 222a and 222b are formed in the same process as the conductive layer 223.
- the process can be simplified.
- An insulating layer 218 may be provided over the transistor 205R.
- An insulating layer 214 is provided over the insulating layer 218 .
- the conductive layer 233R is provided so as to cover the opening 191R provided in the insulating layers 218 and 214 .
- the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 111R through the conductive layer 233R.
- the width 191d can be said to be the distance between the ends of the insulating layer 214 facing each other on the insulating layer 218 . Note that a structure in which the insulating layer 218 is not provided may be employed.
- the transistor 205R shown in FIG. 11B has a metal oxide layer 227 between the insulating layer 225 and the conductive layer 223.
- the conductive layer 223 and the metal oxide layer 227 are processed so that top surface shapes thereof substantially match each other.
- the metal oxide layer 227 can be formed by processing using a resist mask for processing the conductive layer 223, for example.
- the metal oxide layer 227 has the function of supplying oxygen into the insulating layer 225 . Further, when a conductive film containing a metal or alloy that is easily oxidized is used as the conductive layer 223, the metal oxide layer 227 functions as a barrier layer that prevents the conductive layer 223 from being oxidized by oxygen in the insulating layer 225. You can also make it work. Note that the metal oxide layer 227 may be removed before the conductive layer 223 is formed, so that the conductive layer 223 and the insulating layer 225 are in contact with each other. Note that the metal oxide layer 227 may be omitted if unnecessary.
- a metal oxide layer 227 located between the insulating layer 225 and the conductive layer 223 functions as a barrier film that prevents oxygen contained in the insulating layer 225 from diffusing to the conductive layer 223 side. Further, the metal oxide layer 227 also functions as a barrier film that prevents impurities including hydrogen elements contained in the conductive layer 223 from diffusing to the insulating layer 225 side. Note that the hydrogen element is used as an impurity, for example, hydrogen, water, or the like. For the metal oxide layer 227 , for example, it is preferable to use a material that is less permeable to oxygen and hydrogen than at least the insulating layer 225 .
- the metal oxide layer 227 can prevent oxygen from diffusing from the insulating layer 225 to the conductive layer 223 even when a metal material that easily absorbs oxygen is used for the conductive layer 223 . Further, even when the conductive layer 223 contains hydrogen, diffusion of hydrogen from the conductive layer 223 to the semiconductor layer 231 through the insulating layer 225 can be prevented. As a result, the carrier concentration in the channel formation region of the semiconductor layer 231 can be made extremely low. Metal materials that easily absorb oxygen include, for example, aluminum and copper.
- An insulating material or a conductive material can be used for the metal oxide layer 227 .
- the metal oxide layer 227 functions as part of the gate insulating layer.
- the metal oxide layer 227 has conductivity, the metal oxide layer 227 functions as part of the gate electrode.
- an insulating material with a higher dielectric constant than silicon oxide is preferable to use as the metal oxide layer 227 .
- an aluminum oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, a hafnium aluminate film, or the like is preferably used because driving voltage can be reduced.
- a conductive oxide such as indium oxide, indium tin oxide (ITO), or indium tin oxide containing silicon (ITSO) can also be used as the metal oxide layer 227 .
- ITO indium tin oxide
- ITSO indium tin oxide containing silicon
- a conductive oxide containing indium is preferable because of its high conductivity.
- an oxide material containing one or more of the same elements is preferable to use as the semiconductor layer 231 as the metal oxide layer 227 .
- an oxide semiconductor material that can be used for the semiconductor layer 231 is preferably used.
- the metal oxide layer 227 is preferably formed using a sputtering device.
- oxygen can be preferably added to one or both of the insulating layer 225 and the semiconductor layer 231 by forming the oxide film in an atmosphere containing an oxygen gas.
- a metal oxide film that can be used for the metal oxide layer 227 may be formed, oxygen may be supplied to the insulating layer 225, and then the metal oxide film may be removed. Further, the metal oxide layer 227 or the metal oxide film that can be used for the metal oxide layer 227 may be omitted if unnecessary.
- metal oxide layer 227 can also be applied to other configuration examples.
- a transistor 205R shown in FIG. 12A has a conductive layer 221, an insulating layer 211, and a semiconductor layer 231 stacked in this order.
- the transistor 205R is a so-called bottom-gate transistor in which a gate electrode is provided below the semiconductor layer 231 .
- Part of the insulating layer 211 functions as a gate insulating layer of the transistor 205R.
- the conductive layer 221 functions as a gate electrode of the transistor 205R.
- a conductive layer 222 a and a conductive layer 222 b functioning as a source or a drain are provided over the semiconductor layer 231 .
- the transistor 205R can be said to be a BGTC (Bottom Gate Top Contact) type transistor.
- An insulating layer 218 may be provided over the transistor 205R.
- An insulating layer 214 is provided over the insulating layer 218 .
- the conductive layer 233R is provided so as to cover the opening 191R provided in the insulating layers 218 and 214 .
- the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 111R through the conductive layer 233R. Note that a structure in which the insulating layer 218 is not provided may be employed.
- a transistor 205R shown in FIG. 12B has a conductive layer 230 functioning as a back gate.
- the conductive layer 230 has a region overlapping with the semiconductor layer 231 with the insulating layer 218 provided therebetween.
- the conductive layer 230 has a region overlapping with the conductive layer 221 functioning as a gate with the semiconductor layer 231 interposed therebetween.
- An insulating layer 215 may be provided to cover the conductive layer 230 and the insulating layer 218 .
- An insulating layer 214 is provided over the insulating layer 215 .
- the conductive layer 233R is provided so as to cover the opening 191R provided in the insulating layer 218, the insulating layer 215, and the insulating layer 214.
- the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 111R through the conductive layer 233R. Note that a structure in which the insulating layer 215 is not provided may be employed.
- the insulating layer 215 functions as a protective layer for the transistor 205R.
- the insulating layer 215 is preferably made of a material in which impurities are difficult to diffuse. By providing the insulating layer 215, diffusion of impurities from the outside into the transistor can be effectively suppressed, and the reliability of the display device can be improved.
- a material that can be used for the insulating layer 218 can be used for the insulating layer 215 .
- the width 191d can be said to be the distance between the ends of the insulating layer 214 facing each other on the insulating layer 215 .
- a transistor 205R shown in FIG. 13 has a semiconductor layer 231, an insulating layer 211, and a conductive layer 221 stacked in this order.
- the transistor 205R is a so-called top-gate transistor in which a gate electrode is provided over the semiconductor layer 231 .
- Part of the insulating layer 211 functions as a gate insulating layer of the transistor 205R.
- the conductive layer 221 functions as a gate electrode of the transistor 205R.
- a conductive layer 222 a and a conductive layer 222 b functioning as a source or a drain are provided over the semiconductor layer 231 .
- the transistor 205R can be said to be a TGTC (Top Gate Top Contact) type transistor.
- An insulating layer 215 may be provided over the transistor 205R.
- An insulating layer 214 is provided over the insulating layer 215 .
- the conductive layer 233R is provided so as to cover the opening 191R provided in the insulating layer 211, the insulating layer 215, and the insulating layer 214.
- the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 111R through the conductive layer 233R. Note that a structure in which the insulating layer 215 is not provided may be employed.
- FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view between dashed-dotted lines X1-X2 and Y1-Y2 in FIG. 1A.
- the display device shown in FIG. 14 mainly differs from the display device shown in FIG.
- the insulating layer 239 is provided on the insulating layer 235 and has openings in regions overlapping the openings 193 of the insulating layer 235 .
- a pixel electrode 111 is provided over the insulating layer 235 .
- the pixel electrode 111 is provided so as to cover the opening of the insulating layer 235 and the opening 193R of the insulating layer 235 .
- the pixel electrode 111 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 233 through the opening of the insulating layer 235 and the opening 193R of the insulating layer 235 .
- the insulating layer 239 can function as an etching protection film when the layers 113, mask layers 118 and 119 are formed.
- the insulating layer 239 it is possible to prevent the insulating layer 235 from being partially etched when the layers 113, 118, and 119 are formed. In other words, the steps on the surface on which the insulating layer 125 is formed are reduced, and the coverage of the insulating layer 125 can be improved. Therefore, the side surface of the layer 113 is covered with the insulating layer 125, and peeling of the layer 113 can be prevented.
- the insulating layer 239 can be an insulating layer containing an inorganic material.
- an inorganic insulating film such as an oxide insulating film, a nitride insulating film, an oxynitride insulating film, or a nitride oxide insulating film can be used, for example.
- the insulating layer 239 may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure.
- the oxide insulating film includes a silicon oxide film, an aluminum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, an indium gallium zinc oxide film, a gallium oxide film, a germanium oxide film, an yttrium oxide film, a zirconium oxide film, a lanthanum oxide film, a neodymium oxide film, and an oxide film.
- a hafnium film, a tantalum oxide film, and the like are included.
- the nitride insulating film include a silicon nitride film and an aluminum nitride film.
- Examples of the oxynitride insulating film include a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxynitride film, and the like.
- nitride oxide insulating film examples include a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride oxide film, and the like.
- a silicon oxide film or a silicon oxynitride film can be preferably used for the insulating layer 239, for example.
- a material having a high etching rate ratio also referred to as a high selection ratio
- a portion of the insulating layer 239 may be removed in a region that does not overlap with any of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B.
- the thickness of the insulating layer 239 in a region that overlaps none of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B may be thinner than the thickness of the insulating layer 239 in a region that overlaps with the layer 113R, the layer 113G, or the layer 113B.
- insulating layer 239 can also be applied to other configuration examples.
- FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view between the dashed-dotted line X1-X2 and the dashed-dotted line Y1-Y2 in FIG. 1A.
- the display device shown in FIG. The main difference from the display device shown in FIG.
- the detailed description of the insulating layer 239 is omitted because the above description can be referred to.
- the insulating layer 238 is provided on the insulating layer 214 and has openings in regions overlapping the openings 191 of the insulating layer 214 .
- a conductive layer 233 is provided over the insulating layer 238 .
- the conductive layer 233 is provided so as to cover the opening of the insulating layer 238 and the opening 191R of the insulating layer 214 .
- the conductive layer 233 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205 through the opening of the insulating layer 238 and the opening 191R of the insulating layer 214.
- the insulating layer 238 can function as an etching protection film when the conductive layer 233 is formed.
- the insulating layer 2308 it is possible to prevent the insulating layer 214 from being uneven due to part of the insulating layer 214 being etched when the conductive layer 233 is formed. Accordingly, the step on the surface on which the insulating layer 235 is formed can be reduced, and the planarity of the insulating layer 235 can be improved. Therefore, the flatness of the surface on which the light-emitting device 130 is formed is improved, and it is possible to prevent a connection failure due to step disconnection of the common electrode and an increase in electrical resistance due to a local decrease in the thickness of the common electrode 115 . A high-quality display device can be obtained.
- a material that can be used for the insulating layer 239 can be used for the insulating layer 238 .
- a silicon oxide film or a silicon oxynitride film can be preferably used for the insulating layer 238, for example.
- the insulating layer 2308 it is preferable to select a material that has a high etching rate ratio (high selection ratio) with respect to the film to be the conductive layer 233 when the film is etched.
- a portion of the insulating layer 235 may be removed in a region that does not overlap with any of the conductive layers 233R, 233G, and 233B.
- the thickness of the insulating layer 235 in the region overlapping none of the conductive layer 233R, the conductive layer 233G, and the conductive layer 233B is greater than the thickness of the insulating layer 235 in the region overlapping with the conductive layer 233R, the conductive layer 233G, or the conductive layer 233B. It can be thin.
- FIG. 15 illustrates a structure in which the insulating layer 238 is provided between the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235
- the insulating layer 238 is provided in a region that overlaps with any of the conductive layers 233R, 233G, and 233B, and does not overlap with any of the conductive layers 233R, 233G, and 233B.
- a structure in which the insulating layer 238 is not provided may be employed.
- the insulating layer 238 is provided in a region sandwiched between the conductive layer 233R and the insulating layer 214, a region sandwiched between the conductive layer 233G and the insulating layer 214, and a region sandwiched between the conductive layer 233B and the insulating layer 214.
- the insulating layer 238 may be removed from a region that overlaps none of the conductive layer 233R, the conductive layer 233G, and the conductive layer 233B.
- the insulating layer 238 may remain in an island shape in a region that overlaps none of the conductive layers 233R, 233G, and 233B.
- an insulating layer 235 is provided in contact with part of the upper surface of the insulating layer 214 .
- insulating layer 238 can also be applied to other configuration examples.
- FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view between dashed-dotted lines X1-X2 and Y1-Y2 in FIG. 1A.
- the display device shown in FIG. 17 differs from the display device shown in FIG. 2 mainly in that the configurations of the light emitting device 130R, the light emitting device 130G, and the light emitting device 130B are different.
- the light emitting device 130R has a layer 113W instead of the layer 113R.
- Light emitting device 130G has layer 113W instead of layer 113G.
- Light emitting device 130B has layer 113W instead of layer 113B.
- Layer 113W may be configured to emit white light, for example.
- a conductive layer having transparency to visible light may be used for the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 129G, and the conductive layer 129B, and the thickness of each layer may be different.
- the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 129G, and the conductive layer 129B can function as optical adjustment layers. By adjusting the film thicknesses of the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 129G, and the conductive layer 129B so as to have the optimum optical path length, even when the layer 113W that emits white light is used, light from the light emitting device 130 It is possible to obtain light in which the light of the desired wavelength is intensified.
- a colored layer 132R transmitting red light, a colored layer 132G transmitting green light, and a colored layer 132B transmitting blue light may be provided on the surface of the substrate 120 on the resin layer 122 side.
- the colored layer 132R is provided in a region overlapping with the light emitting device 130R.
- the colored layer 132G is provided in a region overlapping with the light emitting device 130G.
- the colored layer 132B is provided in a region overlapping with the light emitting device 130B.
- the colored layer 132R can shield light of unnecessary wavelengths emitted from the red light emitting device 130R. With such a configuration, the color purity of light emitted from each light emitting device can be enhanced.
- a combination of the light-emitting device 130G and the colored layer 132G and a combination of the light-emitting device 130B and the colored layer 132B have similar effects.
- the colored layer 132R, the colored layer 132G, and the colored layer 132B can also be applied to other configuration examples.
- FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view between dashed-dotted lines X1-X2 and Y1-Y2 in FIG. 1A.
- the display device shown in FIG. 18 is mainly different from the display device shown in FIG.
- the insulating layer 237 covers the upper surface end portions of the pixel electrode 111R, the pixel electrode 111G, and the pixel electrode 111B.
- the insulating layer 237 functions as a partition (also referred to as a bank or spacer).
- the insulating layer 237 By providing the insulating layer 237, the pixel electrode 111, the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are in contact with each other, and short-circuiting of the light emitting device 130 can be suppressed.
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B can be formed using a fine metal mask (FMM).
- FMM fine metal mask
- a layer 113R, a layer 113G, and a layer 113B may be provided on the insulating layer 237.
- FIG. 18 illustrates a structure in which adjacent layers 113 are not in contact with each other; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this.
- Adjacent layers 113 may be in contact on the insulating layer 237 .
- adjacent layers 113 may overlap on the insulating layer 237 .
- the layers 113R and 113G may be in contact with each other, or the layers 113R and 113G may overlap each other.
- insulating layer 237 can also be applied to other configuration examples.
- FIG. 19 shows a top view of the display device 100 different from FIG. 1A.
- a pixel 110 shown in FIG. 19 is composed of four types of sub-pixels: a sub-pixel 11R, a sub-pixel 11G, a sub-pixel 11B, and a sub-pixel 11S.
- the sub-pixels 11R, 11G, 11B, and 11S can be configured to have light-emitting devices with different emission colors.
- sub-pixels of four colors of R, G, B, and W sub-pixels of four colors of R, G, B, and Y
- sub-pixels of four colors of R, G, B, and Y sub-pixels of R, G, B, and Y
- four sub-pixels of R, G, B, and IR may be used.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention may include a light-receiving device in a pixel.
- three may be configured with light-emitting devices, and the remaining one may be configured with light-receiving devices.
- a pn-type or pin-type photodiode can be used as the light receiving device.
- a light-receiving device functions as a photoelectric conversion device (also referred to as a photoelectric conversion element) that detects light incident on the light-receiving device and generates an electric charge. The amount of charge generated from the light receiving device is determined based on the amount of light incident on the light receiving device.
- the light receiving device can detect one or both of visible light and infrared light.
- visible light for example, one or more of colors such as blue, purple, violet, green, yellow-green, yellow, orange, and red can be detected.
- infrared light it is possible to detect an object even in a dark place, which is preferable.
- organic photodiode having a layer containing an organic compound as the light receiving device.
- Organic photodiodes can be easily made thinner, lighter, and larger, and have a high degree of freedom in shape and design, so that they can be applied to various display devices.
- an organic EL device is used as the light emitting device and an organic photodiode is used as the light receiving device.
- An organic EL device and an organic photodiode can be formed on the same substrate. Therefore, an organic photodiode can be incorporated in a display device using an organic EL device.
- a manufacturing method similar to that for the light-emitting device can also be applied to the light-receiving device.
- the island-shaped active layer (also referred to as a photoelectric conversion layer) of the light receiving device is not formed using a fine metal mask, but is formed by processing after forming a film that will be the active layer over the entire surface. Therefore, the island-shaped active layer can be formed with a uniform thickness. Further, by providing the mask layer over the active layer, the damage to the active layer during the manufacturing process of the display device can be reduced, and the reliability of the light-receiving device can be improved.
- Embodiment 6 can be referred to for the configuration and materials of the light receiving device.
- FIG. 2 can be referred for the cross-sectional view between the dashed-dotted line X1-X2 in FIG. 19, and the cross-sectional view between the dashed-dotted line Y1-Y2.
- an insulating layer is provided on a layer 101 including a transistor, a light emitting device 130R and a light receiving device 150 are provided on the insulating layer, and the light emitting device and the light receiving device are covered.
- a protective layer 131 is provided, and the substrate 120 is bonded by a resin layer 122 .
- An insulating layer 125 and an insulating layer 127 on the insulating layer 125 are provided in a region between the adjacent light emitting device and light receiving device.
- FIG. 20 shows an example in which the light emitting device 130R emits light to the substrate 120 side, and light enters the light receiving device 150 from the substrate 120 side (see light Lem and light Lin).
- the configuration of the light emitting device 130R is as described above.
- the light receiving device 150 has a pixel electrode 111S on the insulating layer 235, a layer 113S on the pixel electrode 111S, a common layer 114 on the layer 113S, and a common electrode 115 on the common layer 114.
- Layer 113S includes at least the active layer.
- the layer 113S includes at least an active layer and preferably has a plurality of functional layers.
- functional layers include carrier transport layers (hole transport layer and electron transport layer) and carrier block layers (hole block layer and electron block layer).
- the layer 113S is a layer provided in the light receiving device 150 and not provided in the light emitting device.
- the functional layers other than the active layer included in the layer 113S may have the same material as the functional layers other than the light-emitting layers included in the layers 113B to 113R.
- the common layer 114 is a sequence of layers shared by the light-emitting and light-receiving devices.
- a layer shared by the light-receiving device and the light-emitting device may have different functions in the light-emitting device and in the light-receiving device. Components are sometimes referred to herein based on their function in the light emitting device.
- a hole-injecting layer functions as a hole-injecting layer in light-emitting devices and as a hole-transporting layer in light-receiving devices.
- an electron-injecting layer functions as an electron-injecting layer in light-emitting devices and as an electron-transporting layer in light-receiving devices.
- a layer shared by the light-receiving device and the light-emitting device may have the same function in the light-emitting device as in the light-receiving device.
- a hole-transporting layer functions as a hole-transporting layer in both a light-emitting device and a light-receiving device
- an electron-transporting layer functions as an electron-transporting layer in both a light-emitting device and a light-receiving device.
- mask layers 118R and 119R are mask layers between the layer 113R and the insulating layer 125 between the layer 113S and the insulating layer 125.
- the mask layer 118R and the mask layer 119R are part of the remaining mask layer provided on the layer 113R when the layer 113R is processed.
- the mask layer 118S and the mask layer 119S are part of the remaining mask layer provided in contact with the upper surface of the layer 113S when processing the layer 113S, which is the layer containing the active layer.
- Mask layer 118R and mask layer 118S may have the same material or may have different materials.
- Mask layer 119R and mask layer 119S may have the same material or may have different materials.
- the light receiving device 150 is electrically connected to the transistor 205S through the conductive layer 233S.
- the conductive layer 233S can be formed in the same step as the conductive layers 233R, 233G, and 233B.
- the transistor 205S can be formed in the same process as the transistors 205R, 205G, and 205B.
- a conductive layer 222b functioning as a source or a drain of the transistor 205S has a region overlapping with the opening 191S of the insulating layer 214.
- the opening 191S can be formed in the same process as the openings 191R, 191G, and 191B.
- a conductive layer 233S is provided to cover the opening 191S.
- Conductive layer 222b is electrically connected to conductive layer 233S at opening 191S.
- the conductive layer 233S has a region that overlaps with the opening 193S of the insulating layer 235.
- the opening 193S can be formed in the same process as the openings 193R, 193G, and 193B.
- the opening 193S is preferably located inside the opening 191S.
- a pixel electrode 111S of the light receiving device 150 is provided to cover the opening 193S.
- the pixel electrode 111S can be formed in the same process as the pixel electrodes 111R, 111G, and 111B.
- FIG. 19 shows an example in which the sub-pixel 11S has a larger aperture ratio (also referred to as size, size of light-emitting region or light-receiving region) than those of the sub-pixels 11R, 11G, and 11B; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto. .
- the aperture ratios of the sub-pixels 11R, 11G, 11B, and 11S can be determined appropriately.
- the aperture ratios of the sub-pixels 11R, 11G, 11B, and 11S may be different, and two or more may be equal or substantially equal.
- the sub-pixel 11S may have a higher aperture ratio than at least one of the sub-pixels 11R, 11G, and 11B.
- the wide light receiving area of the sub-pixel 11S may make it easier to detect the object.
- the aperture ratio of the sub-pixel 11S may be higher than that of the other sub-pixels depending on the definition of the display device, the circuit configuration of the sub-pixels, and the like.
- the sub-pixel 11S may have a lower aperture ratio than at least one of the sub-pixels 11R, 11G, and 11B. If the light-receiving area of the sub-pixel 11S is narrow, the imaging range is narrowed, and blurring of the imaging result can be suppressed and the resolution can be improved. Therefore, high-definition or high-resolution imaging can be performed, which is preferable.
- the sub-pixel 11S can have a detection wavelength, definition, and aperture ratio that match the application.
- an island-shaped EL layer is provided for each light-emitting device, so that generation of leakage current between subpixels can be suppressed. Thereby, crosstalk due to unintended light emission can be prevented, and a high-contrast display device can be realized.
- the edges and the vicinity thereof which may have been damaged during the manufacturing process of the display device, are used as dummy regions, and are not used as light-emitting regions, thereby preventing variations in the characteristics of the light-emitting device. can be suppressed.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can achieve both high definition and high display quality.
- Embodiment 2 In this embodiment, an example of a method for manufacturing a display device of one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Regarding the material and formation method of each element, the description of the same parts as those described in the first embodiment may be omitted. Further, the details of the configuration of the light-emitting device will be described in Embodiment Mode 5.
- the thin films (insulating films, semiconductor films, conductive films, etc.) that make up the display device are formed by sputtering, chemical vapor deposition (CVD), vacuum deposition, pulsed laser deposition (PLD). ) method, Atomic Layer Deposition (ALD) method, or the like.
- CVD methods include a plasma enhanced CVD (PECVD) method, a thermal CVD method, and the like. Also, one of the thermal CVD methods is the metal organic CVD (MOCVD) method.
- Thin films (insulating films, semiconductor films, conductive films, etc.) that make up the display device are processed by spin coating, dipping, spray coating, inkjet, dispensing, screen printing, offset printing, doctor knife method, slit coating, roll coating, curtain It can be formed by a wet film formation method such as coating or knife coating.
- vacuum processes such as vapor deposition and solution processes such as spin coating and inkjet can be used to fabricate light-emitting devices.
- vapor deposition methods include physical vapor deposition (PVD) such as sputtering, ion plating, ion beam vapor deposition, molecular beam vapor deposition, and vacuum vapor deposition, and chemical vapor deposition (CVD).
- PVD physical vapor deposition
- CVD chemical vapor deposition
- the functional layers included in the EL layer, vapor deposition ( vacuum deposition method, etc.), coating method (dip coating method, die coating method, bar coating method, spin coating method, spray coating method, etc.), printing method (inkjet method, screen (stencil printing) method, offset (lithographic printing) method, It can be formed by a method such as a flexographic (letterpress printing) method, a gravure method, or a microcontact method.
- the thin film that constitutes the display device When processing the thin film that constitutes the display device, it can be processed using a photolithography method or the like. Alternatively, the thin film may be processed by a nanoimprint method, a sandblast method, a lift-off method, or the like. Alternatively, an island-shaped thin film may be directly formed by a film formation method using a shielding mask such as a metal mask.
- a photolithography method there are typically the following two methods.
- One is a method of forming a resist mask on a thin film to be processed, processing the thin film by etching or the like, and removing the resist mask.
- the other is a method of forming a thin film having photosensitivity and then exposing and developing the thin film to process the thin film into a desired shape.
- the light used for exposure can be, for example, i-line (wavelength 365 nm), g-line (wavelength 436 nm), h-line (wavelength 405 nm), or a mixture of these.
- ultraviolet rays, KrF laser light, ArF laser light, or the like can also be used.
- extreme ultraviolet (EUV: Extreme Ultra-violet) light or X-rays may be used.
- An electron beam can also be used instead of the light used for exposure. The use of extreme ultraviolet light, X-rays, or electron beams is preferable because extremely fine processing is possible.
- a photomask is not necessary when exposure is performed by scanning a beam such as an electron beam.
- a dry etching method, a wet etching method, a sandblasting method, or the like can be used to etch the thin film.
- the transistor 205R, the transistor 205G, and the transistor 205B are manufactured over the substrate 151.
- the transistor 205R is taken as an example and described with reference to FIGS. 21A to 22C.
- FIGS. 21A to 22C show cross sections in the channel length direction and the channel width direction in each stage of the manufacturing process of the transistor 205R.
- a conductive film to be the conductive layer 221 is formed on the substrate 151 and processed by etching to form the conductive layer 221 . It is preferable to process the conductive layer 221 so that the end portion thereof has a tapered shape. Thereby, the step coverage of the insulating layer 211 to be formed next can be improved.
- Wiring resistance can be reduced by using a conductive film containing copper as the conductive film that becomes the conductive layer 221 .
- a conductive film containing copper is preferably used for a large-sized display device or for a high-resolution display device. Further, even when a conductive film containing copper is used for the conductive layer 221, diffusion of copper to the semiconductor layer 231 side is suppressed by the insulating layer 211, so that a highly reliable transistor can be realized.
- an insulating layer 211 is formed covering the substrate 151 and the conductive layer 221 (FIG. 21A).
- the insulating layer 211 can be formed using a PECVD method, an ALD method, a sputtering method, or the like.
- the insulating layer 211 is formed by stacking an insulating film 211a and an insulating film 211b.
- each insulating film forming the insulating layer 211 is preferably formed by the PECVD method.
- an insulating film containing nitrogen such as a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride film, or a hafnium nitride film
- nitrogen such as a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride oxide film, an aluminum nitride film, or a hafnium nitride film
- oxygen in the insulating film 211b diffuses into the conductive layer 221 and the like, oxygen contained in the insulating film 211b is reduced, and the conductive layer 221 and the like are reduced. Oxidation can be suppressed.
- the insulating film 211b in contact with the semiconductor layer 231 is preferably made of an insulating film containing oxide.
- an oxide film is preferably used for the insulating film 211b.
- the insulating film 211b it is preferable to use a dense insulating film on the surface of which impurities such as water are less likely to be adsorbed.
- the insulating film 211b it is preferable to use an insulating film with as few defects as possible and impurities containing hydrogen elements reduced.
- the insulating film 211b is made of, for example, a silicon oxide film, a silicon oxynitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, an aluminum oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, an yttrium oxide film, a zirconium oxide film, a gallium oxide film, a tantalum oxide film, a magnesium oxide film, or an oxide film.
- An insulating film containing one or more of a lanthanum film, a cerium oxide film, and a neodymium oxide film can be used.
- a silicon oxide film or a silicon oxynitride film is preferably used as the insulating film 211b.
- the insulating film 211b preferably has a region containing oxygen in excess of the stoichiometric composition.
- the insulating film 211b is preferably an insulating film capable of releasing oxygen by heating.
- the insulating film 211b is formed in an atmosphere containing oxygen, heat treatment is performed on the insulating film 211b after being formed in an atmosphere containing oxygen, plasma treatment is performed in an atmosphere containing oxygen after the insulating film 211b is formed, or the like.
- oxygen can be supplied to the insulating film 211b by forming an oxide film over the insulating film 211b in an atmosphere containing oxygen.
- an oxidizing gas may be used in place of or in addition to oxygen.
- an insulating film which can release oxygen by heating may be formed over the insulating film 211b and then heat treatment may be performed to supply oxygen from the insulating film to the insulating film 211b.
- oxygen may be supplied to the insulating film 211b by plasma ion doping or ion implantation.
- the insulating film 211b is preferably formed thicker than the insulating film 211a. Accordingly, the amount of oxygen released from the insulating film 211b by heating is increased, and the amount of hydrogen released from the insulating film 211a is reduced. Accordingly, a large amount of oxygen can be supplied to the semiconductor layer 231 later while suppressing the supply of hydrogen, so that a highly reliable transistor can be realized.
- the thickness of the insulating film 211b is 2 to 50 times that of the insulating film 211a, preferably 3 to 30 times, more preferably 5 to 20 times, still more preferably 7 to 15 times. , the thickness is preferably about 10 times as large.
- Oxygen can be supplied into the insulating film 211b when the metal oxide film to be the semiconductor layer 231 is formed by a sputtering method in an oxygen-containing atmosphere. Then, heat treatment may be performed after the metal oxide film serving as the semiconductor layer is formed. By the heat treatment, oxygen in the insulating film 211b can be more effectively supplied to the metal oxide film, and oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide film can be reduced.
- plasma treatment may be performed in a processing chamber with power lower than that for forming the insulating layer 211 to remove static electricity accumulated on the substrate 151 . good.
- the plasma treatment can be called static elimination treatment.
- the static elimination treatment can use an atmosphere having one or more of nitrogen, dinitrogen monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, hydrogen, ammonia, or noble gases.
- an argon gas atmosphere can be suitably used for the static elimination treatment.
- the static elimination process may use a mixed gas containing a plurality of gases described above.
- the surface of the insulating layer 211 may be removed after the insulating layer 211 is formed. Defects may occur on the surface of the insulating layer 211 due to the above-described static elimination treatment. If there is a defect in the insulating layer 211 functioning as the first gate insulating layer of the transistor 205, it becomes a trap site for carriers, which may degrade the reliability of the transistor 205 in some cases. Therefore, by removing the surface of the insulating layer 211 having defects, the reliability of the transistor 205 can be improved. For removing the surface of the insulating layer 211, for example, cleaning using a cleaning liquid containing hydrofluoric acid can be used.
- Heat treatment may be performed after the insulating layer 211 is formed.
- the heat treatment can reduce defects in the insulating layer 211 .
- an impurity containing a hydrogen element can be included in the insulating layer 211 .
- Impurities containing elemental hydrogen include, for example, hydrogen and water.
- the temperature of the heat treatment is preferably 150°C or higher and lower than the strain point of the substrate, more preferably 250°C or higher and 450°C or lower, further preferably 300°C or higher and 450°C or lower.
- Heat treatment can be performed in an atmosphere containing one or more of noble gas, nitrogen, and oxygen. Dry air (CDA: Clean Dry Air) may be used as the atmosphere containing nitrogen or the atmosphere containing oxygen. Note that it is preferable that the content of hydrogen, water, or the like in the atmosphere is as small as possible.
- a high-purity gas with a dew point of ⁇ 60° C. or lower, preferably ⁇ 100° C. or lower.
- the heat treatment By using an atmosphere containing as little hydrogen, water, or the like as possible, entry of hydrogen, water, or the like into the insulating layer 211 can be suppressed.
- an oven, a rapid thermal annealing (RTA) device, or the like can be used for the heat treatment.
- the heat treatment time can be shortened by using the RTA apparatus.
- the heat treatment may be performed after removing the surface of the insulating layer 211 described above.
- a process of supplying oxygen to the insulating layer 211 may be performed.
- oxygen radicals, oxygen atoms, oxygen atomic ions, oxygen molecular ions, or the like are supplied to the insulating layer 211 by an ion doping method, an ion implantation method, plasma treatment, or the like.
- oxygen may be added to the insulating layer 211 through the film. The film is preferably removed after adding oxygen.
- a conductive film or a semiconductor film containing at least one of indium, zinc, gallium, tin, aluminum, chromium, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, nickel, iron, cobalt, or tungsten is used as the film that suppresses desorption of oxygen. be able to.
- a metal oxide film 231f is formed on the insulating layer 211 (FIG. 21B).
- the metal oxide film 231f is preferably formed by a sputtering method using a metal oxide target.
- the metal oxide film 231f is preferably a dense film with as few defects as possible.
- the metal oxide film 231f is preferably a high-purity film in which impurities including hydrogen elements are reduced as much as possible.
- oxygen gas when forming the metal oxide film 231f.
- oxygen gas when forming the metal oxide film 231f, oxygen can be suitably supplied into the insulating layer 211 .
- oxide used for the insulating film 211a
- oxygen can be suitably supplied into the insulating film 211a.
- oxygen is supplied to the semiconductor layer 231 in a later step, and oxygen vacancies (V 0 ) and oxygen vacancies (V 0 ) in the semiconductor layer 231 are filled with hydrogen ( hereinafter referred to as VOH ) can be reduced.
- oxygen gas may be mixed with an inert gas (eg, helium gas, argon gas, xenon gas, etc.).
- an inert gas eg, helium gas, argon gas, xenon gas, etc.
- the crystallinity of the metal oxide film can be increased and the reliability can be increased as the ratio of the oxygen gas to the total deposition gas (hereinafter also referred to as the oxygen flow rate ratio) is higher when the metal oxide film is formed. It is possible to realize a transistor with a high
- the lower the oxygen flow rate the lower the crystallinity of the metal oxide film, and the transistor can have a large on-state current.
- the deposition conditions for the metal oxide film are as follows: the substrate temperature is room temperature or higher and 250°C or lower, preferably room temperature or higher and 200°C or lower, more preferably room temperature or higher and 140°C or lower. For example, if the substrate temperature is room temperature or higher and lower than 140° C., the productivity is increased, which is preferable. In addition, the crystallinity can be lowered by forming the metal oxide film with the substrate temperature set to room temperature or without heating the substrate.
- At least one of a process for desorbing water, hydrogen, organic substances, etc. adsorbed on the surface of the insulating layer 211 and a process for supplying oxygen into the insulating layer 211 is performed. It is preferable to do one.
- heat treatment can be performed at a temperature of 70° C. to 200° C. in a reduced pressure atmosphere.
- plasma treatment may be performed in an atmosphere containing oxygen.
- oxygen may be supplied to the insulating layer 211 by plasma treatment in an atmosphere containing an oxidizing gas such as dinitrogen monoxide (N 2 O).
- a metal oxide film 231f is preferably formed continuously without exposing the surface of the insulating layer 211 to the atmosphere.
- the semiconductor layer 231 has a stacked structure in which a plurality of semiconductor layers are stacked, a metal oxide film is formed first, and then the film is continuously formed in the following manner without exposing the surface to the air. It is preferable to deposit a metal oxide film.
- the island-shaped semiconductor layer 231 is formed by partially etching the metal oxide film 231f.
- One or both of a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the metal oxide film 231f.
- part of the insulating layer 211 that does not overlap with the semiconductor layer 231 is etched and thinned in some cases.
- the insulating film 211b of the insulating layer 211 may disappear by etching, and the surface of the insulating film 211a may be exposed.
- heat treatment is preferably performed after the metal oxide film 231f is formed or after the metal oxide film 231f is processed into the semiconductor layer 231. Hydrogen or water contained in the metal oxide film 231f or the semiconductor layer 231 or adsorbed to the surface can be removed by the heat treatment. Further, the heat treatment may improve the film quality of the metal oxide film 231f or the semiconductor layer 231 (eg, reduce defects, improve crystallinity, and the like).
- Oxygen can also be supplied from the insulating layer 211 to the metal oxide film 231f or the semiconductor layer 231 by heat treatment. At this time, heat treatment is preferably performed before the semiconductor layer 231 is processed.
- the temperature of the heat treatment can be typically 150° C. or higher and lower than the strain point of the substrate, or 200° C. or higher and 500° C. or lower, or 250° C. or higher and 450° C. or lower, or 300° C. or higher and 450° C. or lower.
- Heat treatment can be performed in an atmosphere containing a noble gas or nitrogen. Alternatively, after heating in the atmosphere, heating may be performed in an atmosphere containing oxygen. Alternatively, it may be heated in a dry air atmosphere. Note that it is preferable that the atmosphere of the heat treatment does not contain hydrogen, water, or the like as much as possible.
- An electric furnace, an RTA apparatus, or the like can be used for the heat treatment. By using the RTA apparatus, the heat treatment time can be shortened.
- the heat treatment does not have to be performed if unnecessary. Further, the heat treatment may not be performed here, and may be combined with the heat treatment performed in a later step. Further, in some cases, the heat treatment can also be performed in a high-temperature treatment in a later process (for example, a film formation process).
- an insulating layer 225 is formed covering the insulating layer 211 and the semiconductor layer 231 (FIG. 21C).
- the insulating layer 225 is preferably formed by PECVD.
- the insulating layer 225 may have a laminated structure.
- the surface of the semiconductor layer 231 it is preferable to subject the surface of the semiconductor layer 231 to plasma treatment before forming the insulating layer 225 .
- Impurities such as water adsorbed to the surface of the semiconductor layer 231 can be reduced by the plasma treatment. Therefore, impurities at the interface between the semiconductor layer 231 and the insulating layer 225 can be reduced, so that a highly reliable transistor can be realized.
- plasma treatment can be performed, for example, in an atmosphere of oxygen, ozone, nitrogen, dinitrogen monoxide, argon, or the like. Further, plasma treatment and deposition of the insulating layer 225 are preferably performed successively without exposure to the air.
- the substrate temperature during the formation of the insulating layer 225 is high.
- the insulating layer 225 can have few defects.
- metal atoms of the semiconductor layer 231 may diffuse into the insulating layer 225 and defects may be generated in the insulating layer 225 .
- silicon atoms in the insulating layer 225 are replaced with metal atoms contained in the semiconductor layer 231.
- the substrate temperature during the deposition of the insulating layer 225 is preferably 180° C. to 450° C., more preferably 200° C. to 450° C., further preferably 200° C. to 400° C., further preferably 250° C. to 400° C.
- the following is preferable, more preferably 250° C. or higher and 350° C. or lower, further preferably 300° C. or higher and 350° C. or lower, furthermore preferably .
- Heat treatment is preferably performed after the insulating layer 225 is formed. Hydrogen or water contained in the insulating layer 225 or adsorbed to the surface can be removed by heat treatment. Also, defects in the insulating layer 225 can be reduced.
- the above description can be referred to for the conditions of the heat treatment. Note that the heat treatment may not be performed if unnecessary. Further, the heat treatment may not be performed here, and may be combined with the heat treatment performed in a later step. Further, in some cases, the heat treatment can also be performed in a high-temperature treatment in a later process (for example, a film formation process).
- the insulating layer 225 and part of the insulating layer 211 are etched to form an opening 147 reaching the conductive layer 221 . Accordingly, the conductive layer 221 and the conductive layer 223 to be formed later can be electrically connected through the opening 147 .
- a conductive film to be the conductive layer 223 is formed on the insulating layer 225 and processed by etching to form the conductive layer 223 (FIG. 21D).
- a conductive film to be the conductive layer 223 is preferably formed by, for example, a sputtering method using a sputtering target containing a metal or an alloy.
- a low-resistance metal or alloy material is preferably used for the conductive film.
- the conductive film that becomes the conductive layer 223 it is preferable to use a material that releases a small amount of hydrogen and that makes it difficult for hydrogen to diffuse.
- a material that is not easily oxidized is preferably used for the conductive film.
- the conductive film for example, it is preferable to use a laminated film in which a conductive film which is difficult to be oxidized and to which hydrogen is difficult to diffuse and a conductive film which has low resistance are stacked.
- One or both of a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the conductive film that becomes the conductive layer 223 .
- the insulating layer 225 is not etched to cover the upper surface and side surfaces of the semiconductor layer 231 and the insulating layer 211 , so that the semiconductor layer 231 and the insulating layer 211 are formed when the conductive layer 223 is formed. can be prevented from being partially etched and the film thickness being reduced.
- an impurity element 145 is supplied (also referred to as addition or injection) to the semiconductor layer 231 through the insulating layer 225 (FIG. 22A).
- a low-resistance region 231n can be formed in a region of the semiconductor layer 231 not covered with the conductive layer 223 .
- the conditions for supplying the impurity element 145 are set in consideration of the material and thickness of the conductive layer 223 serving as a mask so that the impurity element 145 is not supplied to the region of the semiconductor layer 231 overlapping with the conductive layer 223 as much as possible. is preferably determined. Accordingly, a channel formation region whose impurity concentration is sufficiently reduced can be formed in a region of the semiconductor layer 231 which overlaps with the conductive layer 223 .
- Plasma ion doping or ion implantation can be suitably used to supply the impurity element 145 . These methods allow the concentration profile in the depth direction to be controlled with high accuracy by the ion acceleration voltage, dose amount, and the like. Productivity can be improved by using the plasma ion doping method. Further, by using an ion implantation method using mass separation, the purity of the supplied impurity element can be increased.
- the concentration is the highest at the interface between the semiconductor layer 231 and the insulating layer 225, a portion of the semiconductor layer 231 near the interface, or a portion of the insulating layer 225 near the interface. Furthermore, it is preferable to control the processing conditions. As a result, both the semiconductor layer 231 and the insulating layer 225 can be supplied with the impurity element 145 at the optimum concentration in one process.
- the impurity elements 145 include hydrogen, boron, carbon, nitrogen, fluorine, phosphorus, sulfur, arsenic, aluminum, magnesium, silicon, noble gases, and the like.
- Representative examples of noble gases include helium, neon, argon, krypton, and xenon.
- a gas containing any of the above impurity elements can be used.
- boron typically one or more of B 2 H 6 gas, or BF 3 gas can be used.
- phosphorus typically PH 3 gas can be used.
- a mixed gas obtained by diluting these raw material gases with a noble gas may also be used.
- CH 4 , N 2 , NH 3 , AlH 3 , AlCl 3 , SiH 4 , Si 2 H 6 , F 2 , HF, H 2 , (C 5 H 5 ) 2 Mg, noble gases, etc. can be used.
- the ion source is not limited to a gas, and a solid or liquid that is heated and vaporized may be used.
- the addition of the impurity element 145 can be controlled by setting conditions such as the acceleration voltage and dose amount, taking into consideration the composition, density, thickness, etc. of the insulating layer 225 and the semiconductor layer 231 .
- the acceleration voltage can be in the range of, for example, 5 kV to 100 kV, preferably 7 kV to 70 kV, and more preferably 10 kV to 50 kV.
- the dose is, for example, 1 ⁇ 10 13 ions/cm 2 or more and 1 ⁇ 10 17 ions/cm 2 or less, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 14 ions/cm 2 or more and 5 ⁇ 10 16 ions/cm 2 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 13 ions/cm 2 or more and 1 ⁇ 10 17 ions/cm 2 or less. It can be in the range of 10 15 ions/cm 2 or more and 3 10 16 ions/cm 2 or less.
- the acceleration voltage can be, for example, in the range of 10 kV to 100 kV, preferably 30 kV to 90 kV, and more preferably 40 kV to 80 kV.
- the dose is, for example, 1 ⁇ 10 13 ions/cm 2 or more and 1 ⁇ 10 17 ions/cm 2 or less, preferably 1 ⁇ 10 14 ions/cm 2 or more and 5 ⁇ 10 16 ions/cm 2 or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 13 ions/cm 2 or more and 1 ⁇ 10 17 ions/cm 2 or less.
- the range can be from 10 15 ions/cm 2 to 3 10 16 ions/cm 2 .
- the method of supplying the impurity element 145 is not limited to this, and for example, plasma processing or processing utilizing thermal diffusion by heating may be used.
- the impurity element can be added by generating plasma in a gas atmosphere containing the impurity element to be added and performing plasma treatment.
- a dry etching device, an ashing device, a plasma CVD device, a high-density plasma CVD device, or the like can be used as a device for generating the plasma.
- hydrogen can be supplied as the impurity element 145 to the semiconductor layer 231 in a region that does not overlap with the conductive layer 223 by performing plasma treatment in an atmosphere containing hydrogen gas using a plasma CVD apparatus.
- a plasma CVD apparatus for supplying the impurity element 145 and forming the insulating layer 218, the supplying process for the impurity element 145 and forming the insulating layer 218 can be continuously performed in the apparatus, which improves productivity. can increase
- the impurity element 145 can be supplied to the semiconductor layer 231 through the insulating layer 225 . Therefore, even when the semiconductor layer 231 has crystallinity, damage to the semiconductor layer 231 during supply of the impurity element 145 can be reduced, and loss of crystallinity can be suppressed. Therefore, it is suitable when the electrical resistance increases due to the deterioration of the crystallinity.
- an insulating layer 218 is formed covering the insulating layer 225 and the conductive layer 223 (FIG. 22B).
- the film formation temperature of the insulating layer 218 may be determined in consideration of these factors.
- the film formation temperature of the insulating layer 218 is, for example, 150° C. or higher and 400° C. or lower, preferably 180° C. or higher and 360° C. or lower, more preferably 200° C. or higher and 250° C. or lower.
- Heat treatment may be performed after the insulating layer 218 is formed.
- the heat treatment can make the low-resistance region 231n more stable and have low resistance.
- the impurity element 145 is moderately diffused and locally uniformized, and the low-resistance region 231n having an ideal impurity element concentration gradient can be formed. Note that if the temperature of the heat treatment is too high (eg, 500° C. or higher), the impurity element 145 may diffuse into the channel formation region, degrading the electrical characteristics and reliability of the transistor.
- the heat treatment does not have to be performed if unnecessary. Further, the heat treatment may not be performed here, and may be combined with the heat treatment performed in a later step. Further, when there is a high-temperature treatment in a later process (for example, a film formation process), the heat treatment may be combined with the heat treatment.
- the openings 141a and 141b reaching the low-resistance regions 231n are formed.
- a conductive film is formed over the insulating layer 218 so as to cover the openings 141a and 141b, and the conductive film is processed to form a conductive layer 222a and a conductive layer 222b (FIG. 22C).
- the transistor 205R can be manufactured.
- the transistor 205G and the transistor B can be formed over the same substrate through the same process as the transistor 205R.
- FIGS. 23A to 38 show transistor 205R, transistor 205G, and transistor 205B.
- 23A to 38 show side by side a cross-sectional view along the dashed-dotted line X1-X2 shown in FIG. 16 and a cross-sectional view along the dashed-dotted line Y1-Y2.
- an insulating film 214f to be the insulating layer 214 is formed so as to cover the transistors 205R, 205G, and 205B.
- the insulating layer 214 can be formed by applying a composition containing an organic material by a spin coating method and then selectively exposing and developing the composition.
- a spin coating method As another forming method, one or more of a sputtering method, an evaporation method, a droplet discharge method (inkjet method), screen printing, or offset printing may be used.
- a photosensitive organic material is used for the insulating film 214f, and a region overlapping with the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205R, a region overlapping with the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205G, and a region overlapping with the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205B are formed.
- the state of exposure is schematically shown.
- the light used for exposure preferably contains i-line. Also, the light used for exposure may include at least one of g-line and h-line.
- FIG. 23A light is indicated by arrows, and the regions where the insulating layer 214 is not formed are exposed, and the regions where the insulating layer 214 is formed are shielded from light using a mask 132a.
- the width 191d of the openings 191R, 191G, and 191B can be controlled.
- a positive photosensitive resin for the insulating film 214f is shown here, the present invention is not limited to this.
- a negative photosensitive resin may be used for the insulating film 214f.
- the region where the insulating layer 214 is formed is exposed, and the region where the insulating layer 214 is not formed is shielded from light using a mask.
- the insulating layer 214 is formed in the exposed regions of the insulating film 214f.
- the organic material can be cured by heat treatment.
- the heat treatment temperature is preferably lower than the heat resistance temperature of the organic material.
- the temperature of the heat treatment is preferably 150° C. or higher and 350° C. or lower, more preferably 180° C. or higher and 300° C. or lower, further preferably 200° C. or higher and 270° C. or lower, further preferably 200° C. or higher and 250° C. or lower. is preferably 220° C. or higher and 250° C. or lower.
- the heat treatment can be performed in an atmosphere containing noble gas or nitrogen. Alternatively, it may be heated in a dry air atmosphere. Note that it is preferable that the atmosphere of the heat treatment does not contain hydrogen, water, or the like as much as possible.
- An electric furnace, an RTA apparatus, or the like can be used for the heat treatment.
- an insulating film 238f to be the insulating layer 238 is formed so as to cover the insulating layer 214, the opening 191R, the opening 191G, and the opening 191B.
- a resist mask 195a is formed on the insulating film 238f (FIG. 24A). Either a positive resist or a negative resist may be used for the resist mask 195a.
- the resist mask 195a is not provided in the openings 191R, 191G, and 191B.
- the insulating film 238f is processed using the resist mask 195a as a mask to form an insulating layer 238. Then, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the conductive layers 222b of the transistors 205R, 205G, and 205B are exposed. Either or both of a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the insulating film 238f.
- a conductive film 233f to be the conductive layer 233 is formed so as to cover the insulating layer 238, the insulating layer 214, and the conductive layer 222b.
- a resist mask 195b is formed over the conductive film 233f (FIG. 24B). Either a positive resist or a negative resist may be used for the resist mask 195b.
- the resist mask 195b has regions overlapping with the conductive layers 222b of the transistors 205R, 205G, and 205B.
- the conductive film 233f is processed using the resist mask 195b as a mask to form the conductive layer 233.
- a conductive layer 233 in contact with the conductive layers 222b of the transistors 205R, 205G, and 205B is formed.
- One or both of a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the conductive film 233f.
- a portion of the insulating layer 238 that does not overlap the resist mask 195b may be removed during processing of the conductive film 233f (FIG. 25A). Insulating layer 238 remains between conductive layer 233 and insulating layer 214 . Note that a region of the insulating layer 238 that does not overlap with the resist mask 195b may remain. In this case, the configuration shown in FIG. 15 can be used.
- an insulating film 235f to be the insulating layer 235 is formed so as to cover the insulating layer 214, the insulating layer 238, and the conductive layer 233. Then, as shown in FIG. A method similar to that for the insulating film 214f can be used to form the insulating film 235f.
- FIG. 25B schematically shows how a photosensitive organic material is used for the insulating film 235f and a region overlapping with the conductive layer 233 is exposed.
- light is indicated by arrows, and the regions where the insulating layer 235 is not formed are exposed, and the regions where the insulating layer 235 is formed are shielded from light using a mask 132b.
- the width 193d of the openings 193R, 193G, and 193B can be controlled.
- the width 193d of the opening 193R is preferably smaller than the width 191d of the opening 191R.
- width 193d of opening 193G is preferably smaller than width 191d of opening 191G.
- the width 193d of the opening 193B is preferably smaller than the width 191d of the opening 191B. It is preferable to adjust the exposure amount so that the width 193d of the opening 193R, the opening 193G, and the opening 193B is smaller than the width 191d of the opening 191R, the opening 191G, and the opening 191B.
- the exposure amount of the insulating film 235f is preferably smaller than that of the insulating film 214f.
- the exposure time of the insulating film 235f may be set shorter than the exposure time of the insulating film 214f.
- a positive photosensitive resin for the insulating film 235f
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- a negative photosensitive resin may be used for the insulating film 235f.
- heat treatment it is preferable to perform heat treatment after the insulating layer 235 is formed.
- the description of the heat treatment after the formation of the insulating layer 214 can be referred to, so detailed description thereof is omitted.
- an insulating film 239 f that will be the insulating layer 239 is formed so as to cover the insulating layer 235 and the conductive layer 233 .
- a resist mask 195c is formed on the insulating film 239f (FIG. 26B). Either a positive resist or a negative resist may be used for the resist mask 195c.
- the resist mask 195c is not provided in the openings 193R, 193G, and 193B.
- the insulating film 239f is processed using the resist mask 195c as a mask to form an insulating layer 239. Then, as shown in FIG. This exposes the conductive layer 233 .
- a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the insulating film 239f.
- a conductive film 112f to be the conductive layers 112R, 112G, 112B, and 112p is formed so as to cover the insulating layer 239, the insulating layer 235, and the conductive layer 233.
- a resist mask 195d is formed over the conductive film 112f (FIG. 27A). Either a positive resist or a negative resist may be used for the resist mask 195d.
- the resist mask 195 d has a region overlapping with the conductive layer 223 .
- the conductive film 112f is processed using the resist mask 195d as a mask to form a conductive layer 112R, a conductive layer 112G, a conductive layer 112B, and a conductive layer 112p.
- a conductive layer 112R, a conductive layer 112G, and a conductive layer 112B which are in contact with the conductive layer 223 are formed.
- One or both of a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the conductive film 112f.
- a part of the insulating layer 238 may be removed during processing of the conductive film 233f.
- the thickness of the insulating layer 238 in the region overlapping with any of the conductive layers 112R, 112G, and 112B is the same as the thickness of the insulating layer 238 in the region overlapping none of the conductive layers 112R, 112G, and 112B. It may be thinner than the film thickness of
- a film 128f to be the layer 128 is formed so as to cover the insulating layer 239, the conductive layer 112R, the conductive layer 112R, the conductive layer 112G, the conductive layer 112B, and the conductive layer 112p.
- a method similar to that for the insulating film 214f can be used to form the film 128f.
- FIG. 28 schematically shows how a photosensitive organic material is used for the film 128f and a region overlapping with the conductive layer 233 is exposed.
- Light is indicated by arrows in FIG. 28, and the regions where the layer 128 is not formed are exposed, and the regions where the layer 128 is formed are shielded from light using the mask 132c.
- the shape of the layer 128 can be controlled by adjusting the exposure amount.
- a positive photosensitive resin for the film 128f
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- a negative photosensitive resin may be used for the film 128f.
- the description of the heat treatment after the formation of the insulating layer 214 can be referred to, so detailed description thereof is omitted.
- a conductive film 126f to be a conductive layer 126R, a conductive layer 126G, a conductive layer 126B, and a conductive layer 126p is formed so as to cover the insulating layer 239, the conductive layer 112R, the conductive layer 112G, the conductive layer 112B, the conductive layer 112p, and the layer 128. to form a film.
- the conductive film 126 f is provided over the insulating layer 239 , the conductive layer 112 R, the conductive layer 112 G, the conductive layer 112 B, the conductive layer 112 p, and the layer 128 .
- a material for the conductive film 126f a material with high adhesion to the formation surface is preferably used.
- an alloy of silver, palladium, and copper (APC) has low adhesion to an insulating layer containing an inorganic material, and if it is provided over the insulating layer, there is a possibility that film peeling will occur.
- an inorganic material when used for the insulating layer 239, it is preferable to use a material with high adhesion to the insulating layer 239 on the side of the conductive film 126f that is in contact with the insulating layer 239.
- a stacked structure of In--Si--Sn oxide (ITSO) and a silver-palladium-copper alloy (APC) over the In--Si--Sn oxide (ITSO) can be preferably used. can.
- In—Si—Sn oxide (ITSO) for the layer of the conductive film 126f that is in contact with the insulating layer 239, peeling of the conductive film 126f is suppressed even when an inorganic material is used for the insulating layer 239. be able to.
- the conductive film 126f may be provided over the insulating layer 235, the conductive layer 112R, the conductive layer 112G, the conductive layer 112B, the conductive layer 112p, and the layer 128 without providing the insulating layer 239 (see FIG. 2).
- an organic material is used for the insulating layer 235, a single-layer structure of an alloy of silver, palladium, and copper (APC) can be used for the conductive film 126f.
- a resist mask 195e is formed over the conductive film 126f (FIG. 29B). Either a positive resist or a negative resist may be used for the resist mask 195e.
- the resist mask 195e is provided in a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112R, a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112G, a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112B, and a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112p.
- the conductive film 126f is processed using the resist mask 195e as a mask to form a conductive layer 126R, a conductive layer 126G, a conductive layer 126B, and a conductive layer 126p.
- Either or both of a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the conductive film 126f.
- a conductive layer 129R, a conductive layer 129G, a conductive layer 129B, and a conductive layer 129p are formed.
- a manufacturing method in which the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 129G, and the conductive layer 129B have a stacked-layer structure and the conductive layer 129p has a single-layer structure is described. Note that one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this.
- the conductive layer 129R, the conductive layer 129G, and the conductive layer 129B may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure. Alternatively, the conductive layer 129p may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure.
- a conductive layer 129R, a conductive layer 129G, and a conductive layer 129G are formed so as to cover the insulating layer 239, the conductive layer 112R, the conductive layer 112G, the conductive layer 112B, the conductive layer 112p, the conductive layer 126R, the conductive layer 126G, the conductive layer 126B, and the conductive layer 126p.
- a conductive film 129af to be part of the conductive layer 129B is formed.
- a resist mask 195f is formed over the conductive film 129af (FIG. 30A). Either a positive resist or a negative resist may be used for the resist mask 195g.
- the resist mask 195f is provided in a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112R, a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112G, and a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112B.
- a resist mask is not provided in a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112p is shown.
- the conductive film 129af is processed using the resist mask 195f as a mask to form a conductive layer 129aR, a conductive layer 129aG, and a conductive layer 129aB.
- One or both of a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the conductive film 129af.
- a resist mask 195g is formed over the conductive film 129bf (FIG. 30B). Either a positive resist or a negative resist may be used for the resist mask 195g.
- the resist mask 195g is provided in a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112R, a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112G, a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112B, and a region overlapping with the conductive layer 112p.
- the conductive film 129bf is processed using the resist mask 195g as a mask to form a conductive layer 129bR, a conductive layer 129bG, a conductive layer 129bB, and a conductive layer 129p.
- a wet etching method and a dry etching method may be used for processing the conductive film 129bf.
- a conductive layer 129R having a laminated structure of the conductive layers 129aR and 129bR, a conductive layer 129G having a laminated structure of the conductive layers 129aG and the conductive layers 129bG, and a conductive layer 129B having a laminated structure of the conductive layers 129aB and 129bB are formed.
- the conductive layer 129p can be thinner than the conductive layers 129R, 129G, and 129B. Sputtering or vacuum deposition, for example, can be used to form these conductive films.
- the surface to be treated can be changed from hydrophilic to hydrophobic, or the hydrophobicity of the surface to be treated can be increased.
- the adhesion between the pixel electrode and a film (here, the film 113Rf) formed in a later step can be improved, and film peeling can be suppressed.
- the hydrophobic treatment may not be performed.
- Hydrophobization treatment can be performed, for example, by modifying the pixel electrode with fluorine.
- Fluorine modification can be performed, for example, by treatment with a fluorine-containing gas, heat treatment, plasma treatment in a fluorine-containing gas atmosphere, or the like.
- the gas containing fluorine for example, fluorine gas can be used, and for example, fluorocarbon gas can be used.
- fluorocarbon gas for example, carbon tetrafluoride (CF 4 ) gas, C 4 F 6 gas, C 2 F 6 gas, C 4 F 8 gas, C 5 F 8 gas, or other lower fluorocarbon gas can be used.
- As the gas containing fluorine for example, SF6 gas, NF3 gas, CHF3 gas, etc. can be used.
- helium gas, argon gas, hydrogen gas, or the like can be added to these gases as appropriate.
- the surface of the pixel electrode is subjected to plasma treatment in a gas atmosphere containing a Group 18 element such as argon, and then treated with a silylating agent to make the surface of the pixel electrode hydrophobic.
- a silylating agent hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS), trimethylsilylimidazole (TMSI), or the like can be used.
- HMDS hexamethyldisilazane
- TMSI trimethylsilylimidazole
- the surface of the pixel electrode is also subjected to plasma treatment in a gas atmosphere containing a Group 18 element such as argon, and then to treatment using a silane coupling agent to make the surface of the pixel electrode hydrophobic. can do.
- the surface of the pixel electrode By subjecting the surface of the pixel electrode to plasma treatment in a gas atmosphere containing a group 18 element such as argon, the surface of the pixel electrode can be damaged. This makes it easier for the methyl group contained in the silylating agent such as HMDS to bond to the surface of the pixel electrode. In addition, silane coupling by the silane coupling agent is likely to occur. As described above, the surface of the pixel electrode is subjected to plasma treatment in a gas atmosphere containing a Group 18 element such as argon, and then to treatment using a silylating agent or a silane coupling agent. The surface of the electrodes can be made hydrophobic.
- the treatment using a silylating agent, silane coupling agent, or the like can be performed by applying the silylating agent, silane coupling agent, or the like, for example, using a spin coating method, a dipping method, or the like.
- a vapor phase method is used to form a film containing a silylating agent or a film containing a silane coupling agent on a pixel electrode or the like.
- the material containing the silylating agent or the material containing the silane coupling agent is volatilized so that the atmosphere contains the silylating agent, the silane coupling agent, or the like.
- a substrate on which pixel electrodes and the like are formed is placed in the atmosphere.
- a film containing a silylating agent, a silane coupling agent, or the like can be formed on the pixel electrode, and the surface of the pixel electrode can be made hydrophobic.
- layers 113R, 113G, and 113B are formed.
- a method of forming the layer 113R, the layer 113G, and the layer 113B in this order is described; however, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited to this.
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B can be formed in order of heat resistance. It is preferable that the layer formed first has high heat resistance because it also undergoes the steps of forming other layers. By forming the layer having a material with low heat resistance last, damage during the process can be reduced.
- a film 113Rf that will become the layer 113R is formed on the pixel electrode 111 (FIG. 31B).
- the film 113Rf is not formed on the conductive layer 123 in the cross-sectional view along the dashed-dotted line Y1-Y2.
- the film 113Rf can be formed only in desired regions.
- Employing a film formation process using an area mask and a processing process using a resist mask makes it possible to manufacture a light-emitting device in a relatively simple process.
- the heat resistance temperature of the compounds contained in the film 113Rf is preferably 100° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower, preferably 120° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower, and more preferably 140° C. or higher and 180° C. or lower. This can improve the reliability of the light emitting device.
- the upper limit of the temperature applied in the manufacturing process of the display device can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of selection of materials and formation methods used for the display device, and it is possible to improve the manufacturing yield and reliability.
- the film 113Rf can be formed, for example, by a vapor deposition method, specifically a vacuum vapor deposition method. Also, the film 113Rf may be formed by a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, a coating method, or the like.
- a mask film 118Rf to be the mask layer 118R and a mask film 119Rf to be the mask layer 119R are sequentially formed on the film 113Rf and the conductive layer 123 (FIG. 31B).
- the mask film may have a single-layer structure of the mask film 118Rf or the mask film 119Rf.
- a laminated structure of three or more layers may be used.
- the damage to the film 113Rf during the manufacturing process of the display device can be reduced, and the reliability of the light emitting device can be improved.
- a film having high resistance to the processing conditions of the film 113Rf specifically, a film having a high etching selectivity with respect to the film 113Rf is used.
- a film having a high etching selectivity with respect to the mask film 118Rf is used for the mask film 119Rf.
- the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf are formed at a temperature lower than the heat-resistant temperature of the film 113Rf.
- the substrate temperature when forming the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf is preferably 200° C. or lower, more preferably 150° C. or lower, further preferably 120° C. or lower, further preferably 100° C. or lower, further preferably 80° C. or lower. °C or less is preferred.
- heat resistant temperature indicators include glass transition point, softening point, melting point, thermal decomposition temperature, and 5% weight loss temperature.
- the heat-resistant temperatures of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B can be any temperature that is an index of these heat-resistant temperatures, preferably the lowest temperature among them.
- the substrate temperature when forming the mask film can be 100° C. or higher, 120° C. or higher, or 140° C. or higher.
- the inorganic insulating film can be made denser and have higher barrier properties as the film formation temperature is higher. Therefore, by forming the mask film at such a temperature, the damage to the film 113Rf can be further reduced, and the reliability of the light emitting device can be improved.
- a film that can be removed by a wet etching method is preferably used for the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf.
- damage to the film 113Rf during processing of the mask films 118Rf and 119Rf can be reduced as compared with the case of using the dry etching method.
- the sputtering method, the ALD method (thermal ALD method, PEALD method), the CVD method, and the vacuum deposition method can be used to form the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf.
- the sputtering method, the ALD method (thermal ALD method, PEALD method), the CVD method, and the vacuum deposition method can be used to form the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf.
- it may be formed using the wet film forming method described above.
- the mask film 118Rf formed on and in contact with the film 113Rf is preferably formed using a formation method that causes less damage to the film 113Rf than the mask film 119Rf.
- a formation method that causes less damage to the film 113Rf than the mask film 119Rf.
- the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf for example, one or more of metal films, alloy films, metal oxide films, semiconductor films, organic insulating films, and inorganic insulating films can be used.
- the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf are made of, for example, gold, silver, platinum, magnesium, nickel, tungsten, chromium, molybdenum, iron, cobalt, copper, palladium, titanium, aluminum, yttrium, zirconium, and tantalum.
- a metallic material or an alloy material containing the metallic material can be used.
- a metal film or an alloy film for one or both of the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf, it is possible to suppress plasma damage to the film 113Rf and to suppress deterioration of the film 113Rf, which is preferable. Specifically, it is possible to suppress the film 113Rf from being damaged by plasma in a process using a dry etching method, an ashing process, or the like. In particular, it is preferable to use a metal film such as a tungsten film or an alloy film as the mask film 119Rf.
- In--Ga--Zn oxide indium oxide, In--Zn oxide, In--Sn oxide, indium titanium oxide (In--Ti oxide), indium tin zinc oxide (In-Sn-Zn oxide), indium titanium zinc oxide (In-Ti-Zn oxide), indium gallium tin zinc oxide (In-Ga-Sn-Zn oxide), indium tin containing silicon Metal oxides such as oxides can be used.
- element M is aluminum, silicon, boron, yttrium, copper, vanadium, beryllium, titanium, iron, nickel, germanium, zirconium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten , or one or more selected from magnesium
- M is preferably one or more selected from gallium, aluminum, and yttrium.
- a film containing a material that blocks light, particularly ultraviolet light can be used.
- a film that reflects ultraviolet rays or a film that absorbs ultraviolet rays can be used.
- the light shielding material various materials such as metals, insulators, semiconductors, and semi-metals that are light shielding against ultraviolet light can be used. Since the film is removed in the process, it is preferable that the film be processable by etching, and it is particularly preferable that the processability is good.
- semiconductor materials such as silicon or germanium can be used as materials that are highly compatible with semiconductor manufacturing processes.
- oxides or nitrides of the above semiconductor materials can be used.
- non-metallic materials such as carbon or compounds thereof can be used.
- metals such as titanium, tantalum, tungsten, chromium, aluminum, or alloys containing one or more of these.
- oxides containing the above metals such as titanium oxide or chromium oxide, or nitrides such as titanium nitride, chromium nitride, or tantalum nitride can be used.
- the mask film By using a film containing a material that blocks ultraviolet light as the mask film, it is possible to prevent the EL layer from being irradiated with ultraviolet light during the exposure process. By preventing the EL layer from being damaged by ultraviolet rays, the reliability of the light-emitting device can be improved.
- a film containing a material having a light shielding property against ultraviolet light can produce the same effect even if it is used as a material for the insulating film 125f, which will be described later.
- Various inorganic insulating films that can be used for the protective layer 131 can be used as the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf, respectively.
- an oxide insulating film is preferable because it has higher adhesion to the film 113Rf than a nitride insulating film.
- inorganic insulating materials such as aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, and silicon oxide can be used for the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf, respectively.
- an aluminum oxide film can be formed using the ALD method. Use of the ALD method is preferable because damage to the base (especially the EL layer) can be reduced.
- an inorganic insulating film eg, aluminum oxide film
- an inorganic film eg, In—Ga—Zn oxide film
- material film, silicon film, or tungsten film can be used.
- the same inorganic insulating film can be used for both the mask film 118Rf and the insulating layer 125 to be formed later.
- an aluminum oxide film formed using the ALD method can be used for both the mask film 118Rf and the insulating layer 125 .
- the same film formation conditions may be applied to the mask film 118Rf and the insulating layer 125, or different film formation conditions may be applied.
- the mask film 118Rf can be an insulating layer with high barrier properties against at least one of water and oxygen.
- the mask film 118Rf is a layer which will be mostly or wholly removed in a later process, it is preferable that the mask film 118Rf be easily processed. Therefore, it is preferable to form the mask film 118Rf under the condition that the substrate temperature during film formation is lower than that of the insulating layer 125 .
- An organic material may be used for one or both of the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf.
- a material that can be dissolved in a solvent that is chemically stable with respect to at least the film positioned at the top of the film 113Rf may be used.
- materials that dissolve in water or alcohol can be preferably used.
- it is preferable to dissolve the material in a solvent such as water or alcohol apply the material by a wet film forming method, and then perform heat treatment to evaporate the solvent. At this time, the solvent can be removed at a low temperature in a short time by performing the heat treatment in a reduced pressure atmosphere, so that thermal damage to the film 113Rf can be reduced, which is preferable.
- the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf are each made of polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl butyral, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol, polyglycerin, pullulan, water-soluble cellulose, alcohol-soluble polyamide resin, or perfluoropolymer.
- PVA polyvinyl alcohol
- polyvinyl butyral polyvinylpyrrolidone
- polyethylene glycol polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- polyglycerin polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- water-soluble cellulose polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- pullulan polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- water-soluble cellulose polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- pullulan polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- polyglycerin polyglycerin
- pullulan polyethylene glycol
- an organic film e.g., PVA film
- an inorganic film e.g., PVA film
- a silicon nitride film can be used.
- part of the mask film may remain as a mask layer in the display device of one embodiment of the present invention.
- a resist mask 190a is formed on the mask film 119Rf (FIG. 31B). Either a positive resist or a negative resist may be used for the resist mask 190a.
- the resist mask 190a is provided at a position overlapping the pixel electrode 111R.
- the resist mask 190 a is preferably provided also at a position overlapping with the conductive layer 123 . Accordingly, damage to the conductive layer 123 during the manufacturing process of the display device can be suppressed. Note that the resist mask 190 a is not necessarily provided over the conductive layer 123 .
- a portion of the mask film 119Rf is removed to form a mask layer 119R (FIG. 32A).
- the mask layer 119R remains on the pixel electrode 111R and the conductive layer 123.
- the resist mask 190a is removed (FIG. 32B).
- the mask layer 119R is used as a mask (also referred to as a hard mask) to partially remove the mask film 118Rf to form the mask layer 118R.
- the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf can each be processed by a wet etching method or a dry etching method.
- the processing of the mask film 118Rf and the mask film 119Rf is preferably performed by anisotropic etching.
- TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
- etching gas containing a noble gas such as CF 4 , C 4 F 8 , SF 6 , CHF 3 , Cl 2 , H 2 O, BCl 3 or He as an etching gas.
- the mask film 118Rf is processed by dry etching using CHF3 and He, or CHF3 , He and CH4 . can be done.
- the mask film 119Rf can be processed by wet etching using diluted phosphoric acid. Alternatively, it may be processed by a dry etching method using CH 4 and Ar. Alternatively, the mask film 119Rf can be processed by a wet etching method using diluted phosphoric acid.
- mask film 119Rf When a tungsten film formed by sputtering is used as mask film 119Rf, mask film 119Rf is removed by dry etching using SF 6 , CF 4 and O 2 , or CF 4 and Cl 2 and O 2 . can be processed.
- the resist mask 190a can be removed by, for example, ashing using oxygen plasma.
- oxygen gas and a noble gas such as CF4 , C4F8 , SF6 , CHF3 , Cl2 , H2O , BCl3 , or He may be used.
- the resist mask 190a may be removed by wet etching.
- the mask film 118Rf is positioned on the outermost surface and the film 113Rf is not exposed, damage to the film 113Rf can be suppressed in the step of removing the resist mask 190a.
- the film 113Rf is processed to form the layer 113R.
- the film 113Rf is processed to form the layer 113R.
- a portion of film 113Rf is removed to form layer 113R (FIG. 33A).
- a laminated structure of the layer 113R, the mask layer 118R, and the mask layer 119R remains on the pixel electrode 111R. Also, the pixel electrode 111G and the pixel electrode 111G are exposed.
- the surface of the pixel electrode 111G and the surface of the pixel electrode 111B are exposed to etching gas or etching liquid.
- the surface of the pixel electrode 111R is not exposed to etching gas, etching liquid, or the like.
- the film 113Rf is preferably processed by anisotropic etching.
- Anisotropic dry etching is particularly preferred.
- wet etching may be used.
- the exposed surface is exposed to plasma.
- a metal film or an alloy film for one or both of the mask layer 118R and the mask layer 119R, it is possible to suppress plasma damage to the region of the film 113Rf that will become the layer 113R, and to suppress deterioration of the layer 113R. ,preferable.
- a metal film such as a tungsten film or an alloy film as the mask layer 119R.
- a gas containing oxygen may be used as the etching gas.
- the etching rate can be increased by including oxygen in the etching gas. Therefore, etching can be performed under low power conditions while maintaining a sufficiently high etching rate. Therefore, damage to the film 113Rf can be suppressed. Furthermore, problems such as adhesion of reaction products that occur during etching can be suppressed.
- H 2 , CF 4 , C 4 F 8 , SF 6 , CHF 3 , Cl 2 , H 2 O, BCl 3 , or noble gases such as He and Ar are used.
- a gas containing such a material is preferably used as an etching gas.
- a gas containing one or more of these and oxygen is preferably used as an etching gas.
- oxygen gas may be used as the etching gas.
- a gas containing H 2 and Ar or a gas containing CF 4 and He can be used as the etching gas.
- a gas containing CF 4 , He, and oxygen can be used as the etching gas.
- a gas containing H 2 and Ar and a gas containing oxygen can be used as the etching gas.
- a dry etching apparatus having a high-density plasma source can be used as the dry etching apparatus.
- a dry etching apparatus having a high-density plasma source can be, for example, an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) etching apparatus.
- a capacitively coupled plasma (CCP) etching apparatus having parallel plate electrodes can be used.
- a capacitively coupled plasma etching apparatus having parallel plate electrodes may be configured to apply a high frequency voltage to one electrode of the parallel plate electrodes. Alternatively, a plurality of different high-frequency voltages may be applied to one of the parallel plate electrodes. Alternatively, a high-frequency voltage having the same frequency may be applied to each of the parallel plate electrodes. Alternatively, high-frequency voltages having different frequencies may be applied to parallel plate electrodes.
- FIG. 33A shows an example in which the edge of the layer 113R is located outside the edge of the pixel electrode 111R. With such a structure, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased. Insulating layer 239 can also function as an etching protection film when layer 113, mask layer 118, and mask layer 119 are formed. By providing the insulating layer 239 over the insulating layer 235, part of the insulating layer 235 can be prevented from being removed when the layers 113, 118, and 119 are formed.
- the subsequent steps can be performed without exposing the pixel electrode 111R. If the end of the pixel electrode 111R is exposed, corrosion may occur during an etching process or the like.
- a product generated by corrosion of the pixel electrode 111R may be unstable, and may dissolve in a solution in the case of wet etching, and may scatter in the atmosphere in the case of dry etching. Dissolution of the product into the solution or scattering into the atmosphere causes the product to adhere to, for example, the surface to be processed and the side surface of the layer 113B, adversely affecting the characteristics of the light-emitting device. can form a leakage path between the light emitting devices.
- the adhesion between the layers in contact with each other may be lowered, and the layer 113R or the pixel electrode 111R may be easily peeled off.
- the layer 113R to cover the top and side surfaces of the pixel electrode 111R, for example, the yield and characteristics of the light-emitting device can be improved.
- the layer 113R covers the upper surface and side surfaces of the pixel electrode 111R, so that the layer 113R is provided with a dummy area outside the light emitting area (the area located between the pixel electrode 111R and the common electrode 115).
- the edge of the layer 113R may be damaged during processing of the film 113Rf.
- the edge of the layer 113R may be exposed to plasma and damaged in a later process. Since the end portion of the layer 113R and the vicinity thereof become a dummy region and are not used for light emission, even if damage is applied thereto, the characteristics of the light emitting device are unlikely to be adversely affected.
- the light emitting region of the layer 113R is covered with the mask layer, it is not exposed to the plasma and the damage caused by the plasma is sufficiently reduced.
- the mask layer is preferably provided so as to cover not only the upper surface of the flat portion of the layer 113R that overlaps with the upper surface of the pixel electrode 111R, but also the inclined portion and the upper surface of the flat portion located outside the upper surface of the pixel electrode 111R. . In this way, since the portion of the layer 113R that is less damaged during the manufacturing process is used as the light-emitting region, a long-life light-emitting device with high light-emitting efficiency can be realized.
- the mask layer 119R is formed by forming the resist mask 190a on the mask film 119Rf and partially removing the mask film 119Rf using the resist mask 190a. After that, the layer 113R is formed by removing part of the film 113Rf using the mask layer 119R as a hard mask. Therefore, it can be said that the layer 113R is formed by processing the film 113Rf using the photolithography method. Note that part of the film 113Rf may be removed using the resist mask 190a. After that, the resist mask 190a may be removed.
- the surface state of the pixel electrode may change to hydrophilic.
- the adhesion between the pixel electrode and a film (here, the film 113Gf) formed in a later step can be enhanced, and film peeling can be suppressed. Note that the hydrophobic treatment may not be performed.
- a film 113Gf that will become the layer 113G is formed on the pixel electrode 111G, the pixel electrode 111B, and the mask layer 119R (FIG. 33B).
- the film 113Gf can be formed by methods similar to those that can be used to form the film 113Rf.
- a mask film 118Gf that will become the mask layer 118G and a mask film 119Gf that will later become the mask layer 119G are formed in this order, and then a resist mask 190b is formed (FIG. 15C).
- the materials and formation methods of the mask films 118Gf and 119Gf are the same as the conditions applicable to the mask films 118Rf and 119Rf.
- the material and formation method of the resist mask 190b are the same as the conditions applicable to the resist mask 190a.
- the resist mask 190b is provided at a position overlapping the pixel electrode 111G.
- the resist mask 190b is used to partially remove the mask film 119Gf to form the mask layer 119G.
- the mask layer 119G remains on the pixel electrode 111G.
- the resist mask 190b is removed.
- the mask layer 119G as a mask
- the mask film 118Gf is partly removed to form the mask layer 118G.
- the film 113Gf is processed to form the layer 113G. For example, using mask layer 119G and mask layer 118G as a hard mask, a portion of film 113Gf is removed to form layer 113G (FIG. 34A).
- the surface of the pixel electrode 111B is exposed to an etching gas, an etching liquid, or the like.
- the surface of the pixel electrode 111R and the surface of the pixel electrode 111G are not exposed to etching gas, etching solution, or the like. That is, in the light-emitting device of the second color, the surface of the pixel electrode is exposed in one etching step, and in the light-emitting device of the third color, the surface of the pixel electrode is exposed in two etching steps. It will be done. Therefore, it is preferable to form the island-shaped EL layer first in a light-emitting device whose characteristics are more likely to be affected by the surface state of the pixel electrode. Thereby, the characteristics of the light emitting device of each color can be improved.
- a layered structure of the layer 113G, the mask layer 118G, and the mask layer 119G remains on the pixel electrode 111G. Also, the mask layer 119R and the pixel electrode 111B are exposed.
- the surface state of the pixel electrode may change to hydrophilic.
- adhesion between the pixel electrode and a film (here, the film 113Bf) formed in a later step can be enhanced, and film peeling can be suppressed.
- the hydrophobic treatment may not be performed.
- a film 113Bf that will become the layer 113B is formed on the pixel electrode 111B, the mask layer 119R, and the mask layer 119G (FIG. 34B).
- the film 113Bf can be formed by a method similar to the method that can be used to form the film 113Rf.
- a mask film 118Bf to be the mask layer 118B and a mask film 119Bf to be the mask layer 119B are sequentially formed on the film 113Bf, and then a resist mask 190c is formed (FIG. 34B).
- the materials and formation methods of the mask films 118Bf and 119Bf are the same as the conditions applicable to the mask films 118Rf and 119Rf.
- the material and formation method of the resist mask 190c are similar to the conditions applicable to the resist mask 190a.
- the resist mask 190c is provided at a position overlapping with the pixel electrode 111B.
- a portion of the mask film 119Bf is removed to form a mask layer 119B.
- the mask layer 119B remains on the pixel electrode 111B.
- the resist mask 190c is removed.
- a portion of the mask film 118Bf is removed to form a mask layer 118B.
- the film 113Bf is processed to form the layer 113B. For example, using mask layer 119B and mask layer 118B as a hard mask, a portion of film 113Bf is removed to form layer 113B (FIG. 35A).
- a layered structure of the layer 113B, the mask layer 118B, and the mask layer 119B remains on the pixel electrode 111B. Also, the mask layers 119R and 119G are exposed.
- the side surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B are preferably perpendicular or substantially perpendicular to the formation surface.
- the angle formed by the surface to be formed and these side surfaces be 60 degrees or more and 90 degrees or less.
- the distance between two adjacent layers 113R, 113G, and 113B formed by photolithography is 8 ⁇ m or less, 5 ⁇ m or less, 3 ⁇ m or less, 2 ⁇ m or less, or 1 ⁇ m or less.
- the distance can be defined by, for example, the distance between two adjacent opposing ends of the layers 113B, 113G, and 113R.
- the mask layers 119B, 119G, and 119R may be removed.
- the mask layer 119R, the mask layer 119G, and the mask layer 119B contain a material that blocks ultraviolet rays
- the island-shaped EL layers can be protected from ultraviolet rays by remaining without being removed. It is possible and preferable.
- the same method as the mask layer processing process can be used.
- damage to the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B when removing the mask layer can be reduced compared to the case of using a dry etching method.
- the dry etching method can be used in the manufacturing process of the light emitting device.
- the film is preferably processed by a method that does not use plasma, such as a wet etching method.
- the mask layer may be removed by dissolving it in a solvent such as water or alcohol.
- a solvent such as water or alcohol.
- Alcohols include ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol (IPA), glycerin, and the like.
- a drying process may be performed to remove water contained in the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B and water adsorbed to the surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B.
- heat treatment can be performed in an inert gas atmosphere such as a nitrogen atmosphere or in a reduced-pressure atmosphere.
- the heat treatment can be performed at a substrate temperature of 50° C. to 200° C., preferably 60° C. to 150° C., more preferably 70° C. to 120° C.
- a reduced-pressure atmosphere is preferable because drying can be performed at a lower temperature.
- insulating layer 239, layer 113R, layer 113G, layer 113B, mask layer 118R, mask layer 118G, mask layer 118B, mask layer 119R, mask layer 119G, mask layer 119B, and conductive layer 123 are covered.
- An insulating film 125f to be the layer 125 is formed (FIG. 35B).
- the top surface of the insulating film 125f preferably has high adhesion to the resin composition (for example, a photosensitive resin composition containing an acrylic resin) used for the insulating film 127f.
- the resin composition for example, a photosensitive resin composition containing an acrylic resin
- a silylating agent such as hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS).
- the insulating film 127f to be the insulating layer 127 can be formed with good adhesion.
- the aforementioned hydrophobization treatment may be performed.
- an insulating film 127f to be the insulating layer 127 is formed on the insulating film 125f (FIG. 36).
- the insulating film 125f and the insulating film 127f are preferably formed by a formation method that causes little damage to the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B.
- the insulating film 125f is formed in contact with the side surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B, it is formed by a formation method that causes less damage to the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B than the insulating film 127f. It is preferably coated.
- the insulating films 125f and 127f are formed at temperatures lower than the heat-resistant temperatures of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B, respectively.
- the insulating film 125f can have a low impurity concentration and a high barrier property against at least one of water and oxygen even if the insulating film 125f is thin by raising the substrate temperature when the film is formed.
- the substrate temperature when forming the insulating film 125f and the insulating film 127f is 60° C. or higher, 80° C. or higher, 100° C. or higher, or 120° C. or higher and 200° C. or lower, 180° C. or lower, 160° C. or lower, respectively. , 150° C. or lower, or 140° C. or lower.
- the substrate temperature when forming the insulating film 125f and the insulating film 127f can be 100° C. or higher, 120° C. or higher, or 140° C. or higher, respectively.
- the inorganic insulating film can be made denser and have higher barrier properties as the film formation temperature is higher. Therefore, by forming the insulating film 125f at such a temperature, damage to the layers 113B, 113G, and 113R can be further reduced, and the reliability of the light emitting device can be improved.
- an insulating film having a thickness of 3 nm or more, 5 nm or more, or 10 nm or more and 200 nm or less, 150 nm or less, 100 nm or less, or 50 nm or less can be formed within the above substrate temperature range. preferable.
- the insulating film 125f is preferably formed using, for example, the ALD method.
- the use of the ALD method is preferable because film formation damage can be reduced and a film with high coverage can be formed.
- an aluminum oxide film is preferably formed by ALD, for example.
- the insulating film 125f may be formed using a sputtering method, a CVD method, or a PECVD method, which has a higher film formation rate than the ALD method. Accordingly, a highly reliable display device can be manufactured with high productivity.
- the insulating film 127f is preferably formed using the wet film forming method described above.
- the insulating film 127f is preferably formed, for example, by spin coating using a photosensitive resin, and more specifically, is preferably formed using a photosensitive resin composition containing an acrylic resin.
- Heat treatment (also referred to as pre-baking) is preferably performed after the insulating film 127f is formed.
- the heat treatment is performed at a temperature lower than the heat-resistant temperatures of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B.
- the substrate temperature during the heat treatment is preferably 50° C. or higher and 200° C. or lower, more preferably 60° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower, and even more preferably 70° C. or higher and 120° C. or lower. Thereby, the solvent contained in the insulating film 127f can be removed.
- FIG. 36 schematically illustrates how a photosensitive organic material is used for the insulating film 127f, and a region overlapping the pixel electrode 111R, a region overlapping the pixel electrode 111G, a region overlapping the pixel electrode 111B, and a region overlapping the conductive layer 123 are exposed. clearly shown.
- light is indicated by arrows, and the regions where the insulating layer 127 is not formed are exposed, and the regions where the insulating layer 127 is formed are shielded from light using a mask 132d.
- the shape of the insulating layer 127 can be controlled by adjusting the exposure amount. It is preferable to process the insulating layer 127 so that it has a portion overlapping with the upper surface of the pixel electrode 111 .
- the insulating layer 127 is provided in a region between adjacent pixel electrodes 111 and a region surrounding the conductive layer 123 .
- an acrylic resin is used for the insulating film 127f
- it is preferable to use an alkaline solution as the developer for example, a tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) aqueous solution can be used.
- TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
- a positive photosensitive resin is used for the insulating film 127f
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- a negative photosensitive resin may be used for the insulating film 127f.
- a step of removing residues (so-called scum) generated during development may be performed.
- the residue can be removed by ashing using oxygen plasma.
- a step of removing residues may be performed.
- etching may be performed to adjust the height of the surface of the insulating layer 127 .
- the insulating layer 127 may be processed, for example, by ashing using oxygen plasma.
- the insulating layer 127 may be irradiated with visible light or ultraviolet light by exposing the entire substrate after development and before post-baking.
- the energy density of the exposure is preferably greater than 0 mJ/cm 2 and less than or equal to 800 mJ/cm 2 , more preferably greater than 0 mJ/cm 2 and less than or equal to 500 mJ/cm 2 .
- Such exposure after development can improve the transparency of the insulating layer 127 in some cases.
- the insulating layer 127 can be deformed into a tapered shape at a low temperature.
- not exposing the insulating layer 127 may facilitate changing the shape of the insulating layer 127 or deforming the insulating layer 127 into a tapered shape in a later process. Therefore, it may be preferable not to expose the insulating layer 127 after development.
- heat treatment also called post-baking
- the side surface of the insulating layer 127 can be deformed by the heat treatment. Specifically, the taper angle of the insulating layer 127 can be reduced.
- the heat treatment is performed at a temperature lower than the heat-resistant temperature of the EL layer.
- the heat treatment can be performed at a substrate temperature of 50° C. to 200° C., preferably 60° C. to 150° C., more preferably 70° C. to 130° C.
- the heating atmosphere may be an air atmosphere or an inert gas atmosphere.
- the heating atmosphere may be an atmospheric pressure atmosphere or a reduced pressure atmosphere. A reduced-pressure atmosphere is preferable because drying can be performed at a lower temperature.
- the heat treatment in this step has a higher substrate temperature than the heat treatment (pre-baking) performed after the formation of the insulating film 127f.
- the adhesion between the insulating layer 127 and the insulating layer 125 can be improved, and the corrosion resistance of the insulating layer 127 can also be improved.
- the side surface of the insulating layer 127 may be concavely curved as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B.
- the higher the temperature or the longer the time the easier it is for the insulating layer 127 to change its shape, which may result in the formation of a concave curved surface.
- the shape of the insulating layer 127 may easily change during post-baking.
- the insulating film 125f, the mask layers 119R, 119G, 119B, 118R, 118G, and 118B are partially removed.
- the insulating layer 125 is formed, and openings are formed in the mask layers 119R, 119G, 119B, 118R, 118G, and 118B, respectively, and the layers 113G, 113G, and 113R are formed. , and a portion of the upper surface of the conductive layer 123 are exposed (FIG. 37B).
- wet etching and dry etching may be used for processing the insulating film 125f.
- a wet etching method damage to the layers 113B, 113G, and 113R can be reduced compared to the case of using a dry etching method.
- TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
- phosphoric acid or an etchant containing phosphoric acid is preferably used for wet etching of the In--Ga--Zn oxide film.
- chlorine-based gas When using a dry etching method, it is preferable to use a chlorine-based gas.
- Cl 2 , BCl 3 , SiCl 4 , CCl 4 or the like can be used alone or in combination of two or more gases.
- one or more gases such as oxygen gas, hydrogen gas, helium gas, and argon gas can be mixed with the chlorine-based gas.
- the components contained in the etching gas, the components contained in the insulating film 125f, the components contained in the mask layers 118R, 118G, 118B, 119R, 119G, and 119B are not insulating. It may be included in layer 127 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have improved display quality.
- the insulating layer 127 covers at least one of the insulating layer 125, the mask layer 118R, the mask layer 118G, the mask layer 118B, the mask layer 119R, the mask layer 119G, and the edge of the mask layer 119B. (See FIG. 6B).
- insulating layer 127 may extend over at least one of the top surfaces of layers 113R, 113G, and 113B (see FIGS.
- heat treatment can be performed in an inert gas atmosphere or a reduced pressure atmosphere.
- the heat treatment can be performed at a substrate temperature of 50° C. to 200° C., preferably 60° C. to 150° C., more preferably 70° C. to 120° C.
- a reduced-pressure atmosphere is preferable because dehydration can be performed at a lower temperature.
- the temperature range of the above heat treatment is preferably set as appropriate in consideration of the heat resistance temperature of the EL layer. In consideration of the heat resistance temperature of the EL layer, a temperature of 70° C. or more and 120° C. or less is particularly suitable in the above temperature range.
- the insulating layer 125 and the mask layer are etched together after post-baking, the insulating layer 125 and the mask layer below the edge of the insulating layer 127 disappear due to side etching, forming a cavity.
- the surfaces on which the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are formed become uneven, and the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 are likely to be disconnected. Therefore, it is preferable to separately perform the etching treatment of the insulating layer 125 and the mask layer before and after the post-baking.
- a common layer 114, a common electrode 115, and a protective layer 131 are formed on the insulating layer 127, layers 113R, 113G, and 113B (FIG. 38).
- the common layer 114 can be formed by a vapor deposition method (including a vacuum vapor deposition method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, a coating method, or the like.
- a sputtering method or a vacuum deposition method can be used to form the common electrode 115 .
- a film formed by an evaporation method and a film formed by a sputtering method may be stacked.
- Methods for forming the protective layer 131 include a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, a CVD method, an ALD method, and the like.
- a substrate 120 is prepared, and a light shielding layer 117 is formed on the substrate 120 .
- the display device can be manufactured by bonding the substrate 120 and the light shielding layer 117 to the protective layer 131 using the resin layer 122 (FIG. 16).
- the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235 functioning as planarization layers, unevenness of the surface on which the light-emitting device 130 and the like are formed is reduced. Therefore, the processing accuracy of the light-emitting device 130 and the like provided over the insulating layer 235 is improved, and the display device can have high definition.
- the island-shaped layer 113R, the island-shaped layer 113G, and the island-shaped layer 113R are formed by processing the films to be the layers 113R, 113G, and 113R after forming them over one surface. A layer of uniform thickness can be formed. Then, a high-definition display device or a display device with a high aperture ratio can be realized. In addition, even if the definition or aperture ratio is high and the distance between subpixels is extremely short, it is possible to prevent the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B from contacting each other in adjacent subpixels. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of leakage current between sub-pixels. Thereby, crosstalk due to unintended light emission can be prevented, and a high-contrast display device can be realized.
- the common electrode 115 can be prevented from being cut off when the common electrode 115 is formed. It is possible to prevent the formation of portions where the film thickness is thin. As a result, in the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of poor connection due to the divided portions and an increase in electrical resistance due to the portions where the film thickness is locally thin. Therefore, the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can achieve both high definition and high display quality.
- the pixel electrode 111R, the pixel electrode 111G, the pixel electrode 111B, and the conductive layer 123 are formed (FIG. 31A).
- the above description can be referred to up to the formation of the pixel electrode 111R, the pixel electrode 111G, the pixel electrode 111B, and the conductive layer 123, so detailed description thereof is omitted.
- an insulating layer 237 is formed to cover the pixel electrode 111R, the pixel electrode 111G, the pixel electrode 111B, and the end portions of the conductive layer 123 (FIG. 39A).
- An organic insulating film or an inorganic insulating film can be used for the insulating layer 237 .
- the ends of the insulating layer 237 are preferably tapered. By tapering the end portion of the insulating layer 237, coverage with a film to be formed later can be improved.
- it is preferable to use a photosensitive material for the organic insulating film because the shape of the end portion can be easily controlled by changing the exposure and development conditions.
- an inorganic insulating film may be used as the insulating layer 237 .
- the display device 100 can be a high-definition display device.
- an island-shaped layer 113R is formed on the surface of the pixel electrode 111R (FIG. 39B).
- the layer 113R is preferably formed by vacuum deposition using a fine metal mask. Note that the island-shaped layer 113R may be formed by a sputtering method using a fine metal mask or an inkjet method.
- FIG. 39B schematically shows how the layer 113R is formed using the fine metal mask 151R.
- FIG. 39B shows how the layer 113R is formed by a so-called face-down method, in which the substrate is turned over so that the surface on which the layer 113R is to be formed faces downward.
- the layer 113R can be formed in a wider range than the opening of the fine metal mask 151R. Also, the end of the layer 113R has a tapered shape. A layer 113R may also be formed on the surface of the insulating layer 237 .
- a fine metal mask 151G is used to form a layer 113G on the surface of the pixel electrode 111G (FIG. 40).
- the end of layer 113G is tapered.
- a layer 113G may also be formed on the surface of the insulating layer 237 .
- a fine metal mask 151B is used to form a layer 113B on the surface of the pixel electrode 111B (FIG. 41).
- the end of layer 113B is tapered.
- a layer 113B may also be formed on the surface of the insulating layer 237 .
- the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B are formed in this order is shown here, one embodiment of the present invention is not limited thereto.
- the formation order of the layer 113R, the layer 113G, and the layer 113B is not particularly limited. 41 and the like show an example in which the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B are separated from each other, that is, the adjacent layers 113 are separated without being in contact with each other; this is one embodiment of the present invention. is not limited to Adjacent layers 113 may abut.
- the layer 113R may have a region overlapping with the layer 113G, the layer 113G may have a region overlapping with the layer 113B, and the layer 113R may have a region overlapping with the layer 113B.
- a common layer 114, a common electrode 115, and a protective layer 131 are formed on the insulating layer 127, layers 113R, 113G, and 113B (FIG. 42).
- the common layer 114, the common electrode 115, and the protective layer 131 the above description can be referred to, so detailed description thereof is omitted.
- a substrate 120 is prepared, and a light shielding layer 117 is formed on the substrate 120 .
- the display device can be manufactured by bonding the substrate 120 and the light shielding layer 117 to the protective layer 131 using the resin layer 122 (FIG. 18).
- the insulating layer 214 and the insulating layer 235 functioning as planarization layers, unevenness of the surface on which the light-emitting device 130 and the like are formed is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a connection failure due to a break in the common electrode and an increase in electric resistance caused by a local decrease in the film thickness of the common electrode 115, so that a display device with high display quality can be obtained.
- the arrangement of sub-pixels includes, for example, a stripe arrangement, an S-stripe arrangement, a matrix arrangement, a delta arrangement, a Bayer arrangement, and a pentile arrangement.
- the top surface shape of the sub-pixel shown in the drawings in this embodiment corresponds to the top surface shape of the light emitting region (or light receiving region).
- the top surface shape refers to a shape in plan view, that is, a shape seen from above.
- top surface shapes of sub-pixels include triangles, quadrilaterals (including rectangles and squares), polygons such as pentagons, and polygons with rounded corners, ellipses, and circles.
- the circuit layout that configures the sub-pixel is not limited to the range of the sub-pixel shown in the drawing, and the circuit components may be arranged outside.
- a pixel 110 shown in FIG. 43A is composed of three types of sub-pixels: a sub-pixel 110a, a sub-pixel 110b, and a sub-pixel 110c.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 43B includes a subpixel 110a and a subpixel 110b having a substantially trapezoidal or substantially triangular top shape with rounded corners, and a subpixel 110c having a substantially square or substantially hexagonal top surface shape with rounded corners. have. Also, the sub-pixel 110b has a larger light emitting area than the sub-pixel 110a. Thus, the shape and size of each sub-pixel can be determined independently. For example, sub-pixels with more reliable light emitting devices can be smaller in size.
- FIG. 43C shows an example in which pixels 124a having sub-pixels 110a and 110b and pixels 124b having sub-pixels 110b and 110c are alternately arranged.
- Pixel 124a has two sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a and 110b) in the upper row (first row) and one sub-pixel (sub-pixel 110c) in the lower row (second row).
- Pixel 124b has one sub-pixel (sub-pixel 110c) in the upper row (first row) and two sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a and 110b) in the lower row (second row).
- FIG. 43D is an example in which each sub-pixel has a substantially square top surface shape with rounded corners
- FIG. 43E is an example in which each sub-pixel has a circular top surface shape
- FIG. which has a substantially hexagonal top shape with rounded corners.
- each sub-pixel is arranged inside a hexagonal region that is closely arranged.
- Each sub-pixel is arranged so as to be surrounded by six sub-pixels when focusing on one sub-pixel.
- sub-pixels that emit light of the same color are provided so as not to be adjacent to each other.
- the sub-pixels are provided such that three sub-pixels 110b and three sub-pixels 110c are alternately arranged so as to surround the sub-pixel 110a.
- FIG. 43G is an example in which sub-pixels of each color are arranged in a zigzag pattern. Specifically, when viewed from above, the positions of the upper sides of two sub-pixels (for example, sub-pixel 110a and sub-pixel 110b or sub-pixel 110b and sub-pixel 110c) aligned in the row direction are shifted.
- the sub-pixel 110a is a sub-pixel R that emits red light
- the sub-pixel 110b is a sub-pixel G that emits green light
- the sub-pixel 110c is a sub-pixel that emits blue light.
- Sub-pixel B is preferable. Note that the configuration of the sub-pixels is not limited to this, and the colors exhibited by the sub-pixels and the order in which the sub-pixels are arranged can be determined as appropriate.
- the sub-pixel 110b may be a sub-pixel R that emits red light
- the sub-pixel 110a may be a sub-pixel G that emits green light.
- the top surface shape of the sub-pixel may be a polygonal shape with rounded corners, an elliptical shape, a circular shape, or the like.
- the EL layer is processed into an island shape using a resist mask.
- the resist film formed on the EL layer needs to be cured at a temperature lower than the heat resistance temperature of the EL layer. Therefore, curing of the resist film may be insufficient depending on the heat resistance temperature of the EL layer material and the curing temperature of the resist material.
- a resist film that is insufficiently hardened may take a shape away from the desired shape during processing.
- the top surface shape of the EL layer may be a polygon with rounded corners, an ellipse, or a circle. For example, when a resist mask having a square top surface is formed, a resist mask having a circular top surface is formed, and the EL layer may have a circular top surface.
- a technique for correcting the mask pattern in advance so that the design pattern and the transfer pattern match.
- OPC Optical Proximity Correction
- a pattern for correction is added to a corner portion of a figure on a mask pattern.
- the pixel may have four types of sub-pixels.
- a stripe arrangement is applied to the pixels 110 shown in FIGS. 44A to 44C.
- FIG. 44A is an example in which each sub-pixel has a rectangular top surface shape
- FIG. 44B is an example in which each sub-pixel has a top surface shape connecting two semicircles and a rectangle
- FIG. This is an example where the sub-pixel has an elliptical top surface shape.
- a matrix arrangement is applied to the pixels 110 shown in FIGS. 44D to 44F.
- FIG. 44D is an example in which each sub-pixel has a square top surface shape
- FIG. 44E is an example in which each sub-pixel has a substantially square top surface shape with rounded corners
- FIG. which have a circular top shape.
- FIGS. 44G and 44H show an example in which one pixel 110 is composed of 2 rows and 3 columns.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 44G has three sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c) in the upper row (first row) and one sub-pixel ( sub-pixel 110d).
- pixel 110 has sub-pixel 110a in the left column (first column), sub-pixel 110b in the middle column (second column), and sub-pixel 110b in the right column (third column). It has pixels 110c and sub-pixels 110d over these three columns.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 44H has three sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c) in the upper row (first row) and three sub-pixels 110d in the lower row (second row). have In other words, pixel 110 has sub-pixels 110a and 110d in the left column (first column), sub-pixels 110b and 110d in the center column (second column), and sub-pixels 110b and 110d in the middle column (second column).
- a column (third column) has a sub-pixel 110c and a sub-pixel 110d.
- FIG. 44I shows an example in which one pixel 110 is composed of 3 rows and 2 columns.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 44I has sub-pixels 110a in the upper row (first row) and sub-pixels 110b in the middle row (second row). It has a sub-pixel 110c and one sub-pixel (sub-pixel 110d) in the lower row (third row).
- the pixel 110 has sub-pixels 110a and 110b in the left column (first column), sub-pixel 110c in the right column (second column), and sub-pixels 110c and 110c in the right column (second column). It has a pixel 110d.
- a pixel 110 shown in FIGS. 44A to 44I is composed of four sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c, and 110d.
- the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c, and 110d can be configured to have light-emitting devices with different emission colors.
- As the sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c, and 110d four-color sub-pixels of R, G, B, and white (W), four-color sub-pixels of R, G, B, and Y, or R, G, and B , infrared light (IR) sub-pixels, and the like.
- the sub-pixel 110a is a sub-pixel R that emits red light
- the sub-pixel 110b is a sub-pixel G that emits green light
- the sub-pixel 110c is a sub-pixel that emits blue light.
- the sub-pixel 110d be the sub-pixel B that emits white light, the sub-pixel Y that emits yellow light, or the sub-pixel IR that emits near-infrared light.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIGS. 44G and 44H has a stripe arrangement of R, G, and B, so that the display quality can be improved.
- the layout of R, G, and B is a so-called S-stripe arrangement, so the display quality can be improved.
- the pixel 110 may have sub-pixels with light-receiving devices.
- any one of the sub-pixels 110a to 110d may be a sub-pixel having a light receiving device.
- the sub-pixel 110a is a sub-pixel R that emits red light
- the sub-pixel 110b is a sub-pixel G that emits green light
- the sub-pixel 110c is a sub-pixel that emits blue light.
- the sub-pixel B is the sub-pixel B
- the sub-pixel 110d is the sub-pixel S having the light-receiving device.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIGS. 44G and 44H has a stripe arrangement of R, G, and B, so that the display quality can be improved.
- the layout of R, G, and B is a so-called S-stripe arrangement, so the display quality can be improved.
- the wavelength of light detected by the sub-pixel S having a light receiving device is not particularly limited.
- the sub-pixel S can be configured to detect one or both of visible light and infrared light.
- the pixel can be configured to have five types of sub-pixels.
- FIG. 44J shows an example in which one pixel 110 is composed of 2 rows and 3 columns.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 44J has three sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110a, 110b, 110c) in the upper row (first row) and two sub-pixels ( sub-pixels 110d and 110e).
- pixel 110 has sub-pixels 110a and 110d in the left column (first column), sub-pixel 110b in the center column (second column), and right column (third column). has sub-pixels 110c in the second and third columns, and sub-pixels 110e in the second and third columns.
- FIG. 44K shows an example in which one pixel 110 is composed of 3 rows and 2 columns.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 44K has sub-pixels 110a in the upper row (first row) and sub-pixels 110b in the middle row (second row). It has a sub-pixel 110c and two sub-pixels (sub-pixels 110d and 110e) in the lower row (third row). In other words, pixel 110 has sub-pixels 110a, 110b, and 110d in the left column (first column) and sub-pixels 110c and 110e in the right column (second column).
- the sub-pixel 110a is a sub-pixel R that emits red light
- the sub-pixel 110b is a sub-pixel G that emits green light
- the sub-pixel 110c is a sub-pixel that emits blue light.
- the pixel 110 shown in FIG. 44J has a stripe arrangement of R, G, and B, so that the display quality can be improved.
- the layout of R, G, and B is a so-called S-stripe arrangement, so the display quality can be improved.
- each pixel 110 shown in FIGS. 44J and 44K for example, at least one of the sub-pixels 110d and 110e is preferably the sub-pixel S having a light receiving device.
- the configurations of the light receiving devices may be different from each other. For example, at least a part of the wavelength regions of the light to be detected may be different.
- one of the sub-pixel 110d and the sub-pixel 110e may have a light receiving device that mainly detects visible light, and the other may have a light receiving device that mainly detects infrared light.
- each pixel 110 shown in FIGS. 44J and 44K for example, one of the sub-pixel 110d and the sub-pixel 110e is applied with a sub-pixel S having a light-receiving device, and the other is a light-emitting device that can be used as a light source. It is preferable to apply sub-pixels with For example, it is preferable that one of the sub-pixel 110d and the sub-pixel 110e is a sub-pixel IR that emits infrared light, and the other is a sub-pixel S that has a light receiving device that detects infrared light.
- a pixel having sub-pixels R, G, B, IR, and S an image is displayed using the sub-pixels R, G, and B, and the sub-pixel IR is used as a light source at the sub-pixel S. Reflected infrared light can be detected.
- various layouts can be applied to pixels each including subpixels each including a light-emitting device. Further, a structure in which a pixel includes both a light-emitting device and a light-receiving device can be applied to the display device of one embodiment of the present invention. Also in this case, various layouts can be applied.
- the display device of this embodiment can be a high-definition display device. Therefore, the display device of the present embodiment includes, for example, display units of information terminals (wearable devices) such as wristwatch-type and bracelet-type devices, devices for VR such as head-mounted displays (HMD), and glasses. It can be used for the display part of a wearable device that can be worn on the head, such as a model AR device.
- wearable devices such as wristwatch-type and bracelet-type devices
- VR head-mounted displays (HMD)
- glasses can be used for the display part of a wearable device that can be worn on the head, such as a model AR device.
- the display device of this embodiment can be a high-resolution display device or a large-sized display device. Therefore, the display device of the present embodiment can be used, for example, in televisions, desktop or notebook personal computers, monitors for computers, digital signage, and relatively large screens such as large game machines such as pachinko machines. It can be used for display portions of digital cameras, digital video cameras, digital photo frames, mobile phones, portable game machines, personal digital assistants, and sound reproducing devices, in addition to electronic devices equipped with
- FIG. 45 shows a perspective view of the display device 100G
- FIG. 46 shows a cross-sectional view of the display device 100G.
- the display device 100G has a configuration in which a substrate 152 and a substrate 151 are bonded together.
- the substrate 152 is indicated by dashed lines.
- the display device 100G has a display section 162, a connection section 140, a circuit 164, wiring 165, and the like.
- FIG. 45 shows an example in which an IC 173 and an FPC 172 are mounted on the display device 100G. Therefore, the configuration shown in FIG. 45 can also be said to be a display module including the display device 100G, an IC (integrated circuit), and an FPC.
- connection part 140 is provided outside the display part 162 .
- the connection portion 140 can be provided along one side or a plurality of sides of the display portion 162 .
- the number of connection parts 140 may be singular or plural.
- FIG. 45 shows an example in which connecting portions 140 are provided so as to surround the four sides of the display portion.
- the connection part 140 the common electrode of the light emitting device and the conductive layer are electrically connected, and a potential can be supplied to the common electrode.
- a scanning line driving circuit for example, can be used as the circuit 164 .
- the wiring 165 has a function of supplying signals and power to the display section 162 and the circuit 164 .
- the signal and power are input to the wiring 165 from the outside through the FPC 172 or input to the wiring 165 from the IC 173 .
- FIG. 45 shows an example in which the IC 173 is provided on the substrate 151 by a COG (Chip On Glass) method, a COF (Chip on Film) method, or the like.
- a COG Chip On Glass
- COF Chip on Film
- the IC 173 for example, an IC having a scanning line driver circuit or a signal line driver circuit can be applied.
- the display device 100G and the display module may be configured without an IC.
- the IC may be mounted on the FPC by the COF method or the like.
- part of the area including the FPC 172, part of the circuit 164, part of the display part 162, part of the connection part 140, and part of the area including the end of the display device 100G are cut off.
- An example of a cross section is shown.
- a display device 100G shown in FIG. 46 has a transistor 201, a transistor 205, a light emitting device 130R, a light emitting device 130G, a light emitting device 130B, and the like between a substrate 151 and a substrate 152.
- a portion of the upper surface and side surfaces of the layers 113R, 113G, and 113B are covered with an insulating layer 125 and an insulating layer 127, respectively. Between layer 113R and insulating layer 125 are mask layers 118R and 119R. Between the layer 113G and the insulating layer 125 are located mask layers 118G and 119G, and between the layer 113B and the insulating layer 125 are located mask layers 118B and 119B.
- a common layer 114 is provided over the layers 113B, 113G, 113R, the insulating layer 125, and the insulating layer 127, and a common electrode 115 is provided over the common layer 114.
- Each of the common layer 114 and the common electrode 115 is a series of films provided in common to a plurality of light emitting devices.
- a protective layer 131 is provided on the light emitting device 130R, the light emitting device 130G, and the light emitting device 130B.
- the protective layer 131 and the substrate 152 are adhered via the adhesive layer 142 .
- a light shielding layer 117 is provided on the substrate 152 .
- a solid sealing structure, a hollow sealing structure, or the like can be applied to sealing the light-emitting device.
- the space between substrates 152 and 151 is filled with an adhesive layer 142 to apply a solid sealing structure.
- the space may be filled with an inert gas (such as nitrogen or argon) to apply a hollow sealing structure.
- the adhesive layer 142 may be provided so as not to overlap the light emitting device.
- the space may be filled with a resin different from the adhesive layer 142 provided in a frame shape.
- the protective layer 131 is provided at least on the display section 162 and is preferably provided so as to cover the entire display section 162 .
- the protective layer 131 is preferably provided so as to cover not only the display portion 162 but also the connection portion 140 and the circuit 164 .
- the protective layer 131 is provided up to the end of the display device 100G.
- the connecting portion 204 has a portion where the protective layer 131 is not provided in order to electrically connect the FPC 172 and the conductive layer 166 .
- a connecting portion 204 is provided in a region of the substrate 151 where the substrate 152 does not overlap.
- the wiring 165 is electrically connected to the FPC 172 through the conductive layer 233t, the conductive layer 166 and the connection layer 242.
- FIG. Conductive layer 233 t is electrically connected to wiring 165 through an opening provided in insulating layer 214 .
- the conductive layer 233t can be formed in the same step as the conductive layers 233R, 233G, and 233B.
- the conductive layer 166 can be formed in the same process as the pixel electrodes 111R, 111G, and 111B.
- the conductive layer 166 is exposed on the upper surface of the connecting portion 204 . Thereby, the connecting portion 204 and the FPC 172 can be electrically connected via the connecting layer 242 .
- the conductive layer 166 can be exposed by removing the region of the protective layer 131 overlapping the conductive layer 166 using a mask.
- a laminated structure of at least one organic layer and a conductive layer may be provided on the conductive layer 166, and the protective layer 131 may be provided on the laminated structure. Then, using a laser or a sharp edged tool (e.g., a needle or a cutter) on the laminated structure, a peeling starting point (a portion that triggers peeling) is formed, and the laminated structure and the protective layer thereon are formed. 131 may be selectively removed to expose conductive layer 166 .
- the protective layer 131 can be selectively removed by pressing an adhesive roller against the substrate 151 and relatively moving the roller while rotating. Alternatively, an adhesive tape may be attached to the substrate 151 and removed.
- the adhesion between the organic layer and the conductive layer or the adhesion between the organic layers is low, separation occurs at the interface between the organic layer and the conductive layer or within the organic layer. Accordingly, a region of the protective layer 131 overlapping with the conductive layer 166 can be selectively removed. Note that when an organic layer or the like remains over the conductive layer 166, it can be removed with an organic solvent or the like.
- the organic layer for example, at least one organic layer (a layer that functions as a light-emitting layer, a carrier block layer, a carrier transport layer, or a carrier injection layer) used for any one of the layers 113B, 113G, and 113R is used. be able to.
- the organic layer may be formed at the same time when any one of the layers 113B, 113G, and 113R is formed, or may be provided separately.
- the conductive layer can be formed using the same process and the same material as the common electrode 115 .
- an ITO film is preferably formed as the common electrode 115 and the conductive layer. Note that in the case where the common electrode 115 has a stacked-layer structure, at least one of the layers forming the common electrode 115 is provided as a conductive layer.
- the upper surface of the conductive layer 166 may be covered with a mask so that the protective layer 131 is not formed on the conductive layer 166 .
- a mask for example, a metal mask (area metal mask) may be used, or an adhesive or adsorptive tape or film may be used.
- connection portion 204 a region where the protective layer 131 is not provided is formed in the connection portion 204, and the conductive layer 166 and the FPC 172 can be electrically connected through the connection layer 242 in this region. .
- a conductive layer 123 is provided on the insulating layer 235 in the connecting portion 140 .
- the conductive layer 123 includes a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 112R, 112G, and 112B, and a conductive layer 126R, a conductive layer 126G, and a conductive layer 126B.
- An example of a stacked structure of a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film and a conductive film obtained by processing the same conductive film as the conductive layers 129R, 129G, and 129B is given. showing.
- FIG. A common layer 114 is provided over the conductive layer 123 , and a common electrode 115 is provided over the common layer 114 .
- the conductive layer 123 and the common electrode 115 are electrically connected through the common layer 114 .
- the common layer 114 may not be formed in the connecting portion 140 . In this case, the conductive layer 123 and the common electrode 115 are directly contacted and electrically connected.
- a wiring 233 q is provided on the insulating layer 214 .
- the wiring 233q can be formed in the same step as the conductive layers 233R, 233G, 233B, and 233t.
- wirings can be provided over the insulating layer 214 in addition to wirings that can be formed in the same process as the conductive layers forming the transistor. Accordingly, in a circuit (eg, a pixel circuit) included in a display device, the degree of freedom in arrangement of transistors, capacitors, and wiring is increased, and the area occupied by the circuit can be reduced. In addition, since the degree of freedom in arranging wiring is increased, the parasitic capacitance between wirings can be reduced.
- FIG. 46 shows a configuration in which the insulating layer 238 is provided between the wiring 233q and the insulating layer 214
- a configuration in which the insulating layer 238 is not provided may be employed as shown in FIG. 2 and the like.
- the wiring 233q is provided in contact with the upper surface of the insulating layer 214.
- the display device 100G is of the top emission type. Light emitted by the light emitting device is emitted to the substrate 152 side. A material having high visible light transmittance is preferably used for the substrate 152 .
- the pixel electrode contains a material that reflects visible light, and the counter electrode (common electrode 115) contains a material that transmits visible light.
- Both the transistor 201 and the transistor 205 are formed over the substrate 151 . These transistors can be made with the same material and the same process. Note that the structures of the transistors 201 and 205 are not particularly limited.
- the crystallinity of the semiconductor material used for the transistor is not particularly limited, either. (semiconductors having A single crystal semiconductor or a crystalline semiconductor is preferably used because deterioration in transistor characteristics can be suppressed.
- the semiconductor layer of the transistor preferably has a metal oxide (oxide semiconductor) exhibiting semiconductor characteristics.
- the display device of this embodiment preferably uses a transistor including a metal oxide for a channel formation region (hereinafter referred to as an OS transistor).
- crystalline oxide semiconductors examples include CAAC (c-axis-aligned crystalline)-OS, nc (nanocrystalline)-OS, and the like.
- a transistor using silicon for a channel formation region may be used.
- silicon examples include monocrystalline silicon, polycrystalline silicon, amorphous silicon, and the like.
- a transistor including low temperature poly silicon (LTPS) in a semiconductor layer hereinafter also referred to as an LTPS transistor
- the LTPS transistor has high field effect mobility and good frequency characteristics.
- Si transistors such as LTPS transistors
- circuits that need to be driven at high frequencies for example, source driver circuits
- An OS transistor has extremely high field effect mobility compared to a transistor using amorphous silicon.
- an OS transistor has extremely low source-drain leakage current (hereinafter also referred to as an off-state current) in an off state, and can retain charge accumulated in a capacitor connected in series with the transistor for a long time. is possible. Further, by using the OS transistor, power consumption of the display device can be reduced.
- the amount of current flowing through the light-emitting device included in the pixel circuit In order to increase the luminance of the light-emitting device included in the pixel circuit, it is necessary to increase the amount of current flowing through the light-emitting device. For this purpose, it is necessary to increase the source-drain voltage of the drive transistor included in the pixel circuit. Since the OS transistor has a higher breakdown voltage between the source and the drain than the Si transistor, a high voltage can be applied between the source and the drain of the OS transistor. Therefore, by using an OS transistor as the drive transistor included in the pixel circuit, the amount of current flowing through the light emitting device can be increased, and the light emission luminance of the light emitting device can be increased.
- the OS transistor When the transistor operates in the saturation region, the OS transistor can reduce the change in the source-drain current with respect to the change in the gate-source voltage compared to the Si transistor. Therefore, by applying an OS transistor as a drive transistor included in a pixel circuit, the current flowing between the source and the drain can be finely determined according to the change in the voltage between the gate and the source. can be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to increase the gradation in the pixel circuit.
- the OS transistor In the saturation characteristics of the current that flows when the transistor operates in the saturation region, the OS transistor can flow a more stable current (saturation current) than the Si transistor even when the source-drain voltage gradually increases. can. Therefore, by using the OS transistor as the driving transistor, a stable current can be supplied to the light-emitting device even when the current-voltage characteristics of the EL device vary, for example. That is, when the OS transistor operates in the saturation region, even if the source-drain voltage is increased, the source-drain current hardly changes, so that the light emission luminance of the light-emitting device can be stabilized.
- an OS transistor as a driving transistor included in a pixel circuit, it is possible to suppress black floating, increase emission luminance, provide multiple gradations, and suppress variations in light emitting devices. can be planned.
- Metal oxides used for the semiconductor layer include, for example, indium and an element M (M is gallium, aluminum, silicon, boron, yttrium, tin, copper, vanadium, beryllium, titanium, iron, nickel, germanium, zirconium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, neodymium, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten, and magnesium) and zinc.
- the element M is preferably one or more selected from aluminum, gallium, yttrium, and tin.
- an oxide also referred to as IGZO
- IGZO oxide containing indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc
- an oxide containing indium, tin, and zinc is preferably used.
- oxides containing indium, gallium, tin, and zinc are preferably used.
- an oxide containing indium (In), aluminum (Al), and zinc (Zn) is preferably used.
- an oxide containing indium (In), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn) also referred to as IAGZO
- IAGZO oxide containing indium (In), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn)
- the atomic ratio of In in the In-M-Zn oxide is preferably equal to or higher than the atomic ratio of M.
- the neighboring composition includes a range of ⁇ 30% of the desired atomic number ratio.
- the proportion of the element M in the atomic number ratio can be calculated from the sum of the number of atoms of the two or more metal elements.
- the transistor included in the circuit 164 and the transistor included in the display portion 162 may have the same structure or different structures.
- the plurality of transistors included in the circuit 164 may all have the same structure, or may have two or more types.
- the structures of the plurality of transistors included in the display portion 162 may all be the same, or may be of two or more types.
- All of the transistors in the display portion 162 may be OS transistors, all of the transistors in the display portion 162 may be Si transistors, or some of the transistors in the display portion 162 may be OS transistors and the rest may be Si transistors. good.
- LTPS transistors and OS transistors in the display portion 162
- a display device with low power consumption and high driving capability can be realized.
- a structure in which an LTPS transistor and an OS transistor are combined is sometimes called an LTPO.
- an OS transistor as a transistor or the like that functions as a switch for controlling conduction/non-conduction between wirings, and use an LTPS transistor as a transistor or the like that controls current.
- one of the transistors included in the display portion 162 functions as a transistor for controlling the current flowing through the light emitting device and can also be called a driving transistor.
- One of the source and drain of the driving transistor is electrically connected to the pixel electrode of the light emitting device.
- An LTPS transistor is preferably used as the driving transistor. This makes it possible to increase the current flowing through the light emitting device in the pixel circuit.
- the other transistor included in the display unit 162 functions as a switch for controlling selection and non-selection of pixels, and can also be called a selection transistor.
- the gate of the selection transistor is electrically connected to the gate line, and one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the source line (signal line).
- An OS transistor is preferably used as the selection transistor.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have high aperture ratio, high definition, high display quality, and low power consumption.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes an OS transistor and a light-emitting device with an MML (metal maskless) structure.
- MML metal maskless
- leakage current that can flow in the transistor and leakage current that can flow between adjacent light-emitting devices also referred to as lateral leakage current or side leakage current
- lateral leakage current or side leakage current can be extremely reduced.
- an observer can observe any one or more of sharpness of the image, sharpness of the image, high saturation, and high contrast ratio.
- a layer provided between light-emitting devices (for example, an organic layer commonly used between light-emitting devices, also referred to as a common layer) is Due to the divided structure, side leaks can be eliminated or extremely reduced.
- a light shielding layer 117 is preferably provided on the surface of the substrate 152 on the substrate 151 side.
- the light shielding layer 117 can be provided between adjacent light emitting devices, the connection portion 140, the circuit 164, and the like. Also, various optical members can be arranged outside the substrate 152 .
- Materials that can be used for the substrate 120 can be used for the substrates 151 and 152, respectively.
- a material that can be used for the resin layer 122 can be applied as the adhesive layer 142 .
- connection layer 242 an anisotropic conductive film (ACF: Anisotropic Conductive Film), an anisotropic conductive paste (ACP: Anisotropic Conductive Paste), or the like can be used.
- ACF Anisotropic Conductive Film
- ACP Anisotropic Conductive Paste
- Display device 100H A display device 100H shown in FIG. 47 is mainly different from the display device 100G in that it is a bottom emission type display device.
- the light emitted by the light emitting device is emitted to the substrate 151 side.
- a material having high visible light transmittance is preferably used for the substrate 151 .
- the material used for the substrate 152 may or may not be translucent.
- a light shielding layer 117 is preferably formed between the substrate 151 and the transistor 201 and between the substrate 151 and the transistor 205 .
- 47 shows an example in which the light-blocking layer 117 is provided over the substrate 151, the insulating layer 153 is provided over the light-blocking layer 117, and the transistors 201 and 205 are provided over the insulating layer 153.
- FIG. 47 shows an example in which the light-blocking layer 117 is provided over the substrate 151, the insulating layer 153 is provided over the light-blocking layer 117, and the transistors 201 and 205 are provided over the insulating layer 153.
- the light emitting device 130R has a conductive layer 112R, a conductive layer 126R on the conductive layer 112R, and a conductive layer 129R on the conductive layer 126R.
- the light emitting device 130G has a conductive layer 112G, a conductive layer 126G over the conductive layer 112G, and a conductive layer 129G over the conductive layer 126G.
- conductive layers 112R, 112G, 126R, 126G, 129R, and 129G materials with high visible light transmittance are used.
- a material that reflects visible light is preferably used for the common electrode 115 .
- Display device 100J A display device 100J shown in FIG. 48 is mainly different from the display device 100G in that a light receiving device 150 is provided.
- the light receiving device 150 has a pixel electrode 111 S, a layer 113 S, a common layer 114 and a common electrode 115 .
- Layer 113S has at least an active layer.
- the pixel electrode 111S can be formed in the same process as the pixel electrodes 111R, 111G, and 111B.
- the pixel electrode 111S is connected to the conductive layer 222b of the transistor 205S through the conductive layer 233S.
- the top and side surfaces of the pixel electrode 111S are covered with a layer 113S.
- a portion of the upper surface and side surfaces of the layer 113S are covered with an insulating layer 125 and an insulating layer 127. Between layer 113S and insulating layer 125 are mask layers 118S and 119S.
- a common layer 114 is provided over the layer 113 S, the insulating layer 125 , and the insulating layer 127 , and a common electrode 115 is provided over the common layer 114 .
- the common layer 114 is a continuous film that is commonly provided for the light receiving device and the light emitting device.
- Embodiments 1 and 6 can be referred to.
- the light emitting device has an EL layer 763 between a pair of electrodes (lower electrode 761 and upper electrode 762).
- EL layer 763 can be composed of multiple layers, such as layer 780 , light-emitting layer 771 , and layer 790 .
- the light-emitting layer 771 has at least a light-emitting substance (also referred to as a light-emitting material).
- the layer 780 can be a layer containing a material with high hole injection property (hole injection layer) or a layer containing a material with high hole transport property (positive electrode layer). hole-transporting layer) and a layer containing a highly electron-blocking material (electron-blocking layer).
- the layer 790 includes a layer containing a material with high electron injection properties (electron injection layer), a layer containing a material with high electron transport properties (electron transport layer), and a layer containing a material with high hole blocking properties (positive layer). pore blocking layer).
- layers 780 and 790 are reversed to each other.
- a structure having a layer 780, a light-emitting layer 771, and a layer 790 provided between a pair of electrodes can function as a single light-emitting unit, and the structure of FIG. 49A is called a single structure in this specification.
- FIG. 49B is a modification of the EL layer 763 included in the light emitting device shown in FIG. 49A. Specifically, the light-emitting device shown in FIG. It has a top layer 792 and a top electrode 762 on layer 792 .
- layer 781 is a hole injection layer
- layer 782 is a hole transport layer
- layer 791 is an electron transport layer
- layer 792 is an electron injection layer.
- the layer 781 is an electron injection layer
- the layer 782 is an electron transport layer
- the layer 791 is a hole transport layer
- the layer 792 is a hole injection layer.
- FIGS. 49C and 49D show an example having three light-emitting layers, the number of light-emitting layers in a single-structure light-emitting device may be two or four or more.
- a single structure light emitting device may also have a buffer layer between the two light emitting layers.
- tandem structure a structure in which a plurality of light-emitting units (light-emitting unit 763a and light-emitting unit 763b) are connected in series via a charge generation layer 785 (also referred to as an intermediate layer) is referred to as a tandem structure in this specification. call.
- the tandem structure may also be called a stack structure.
- FIGS. 49D and 49F are examples in which the display device has a layer 764 that overlaps the light emitting device.
- Figure 49D is an example of layer 764 overlapping the light emitting device shown in Figure 49C
- Figure 49F is an example of layer 764 overlapping the light emitting device shown in Figure 49E.
- 49D and 49F a conductive film that transmits visible light is used for the upper electrode 762 in order to extract light to the upper electrode 762 side.
- the layer 764 one or both of a color conversion layer and a color filter (colored layer) can be used.
- the light-emitting layers 771, 772, and 773 may be made of light-emitting substances emitting light of the same color, or even the same light-emitting substance.
- a light-emitting substance that emits blue light may be used for the light-emitting layers 771 , 772 , and 773 .
- a color conversion layer is provided as layer 764 shown in FIG. and can extract red or green light.
- both a color conversion layer and a colored layer are preferably used.
- Some of the light emitted by the light emitting device may pass through without being converted by the color conversion layer.
- the colored layer absorbs light of colors other than the desired color, and the color purity of the light exhibited by the sub-pixels can be increased.
- a single-structure light-emitting device preferably has a light-emitting layer containing a light-emitting substance that emits blue light and a light-emitting layer containing a light-emitting substance that emits visible light with a longer wavelength than blue.
- a color filter may be provided as the layer 764 shown in FIG. 49D.
- a desired color of light can be obtained by passing the white light through the color filter.
- a single-structure light-emitting device has three light-emitting layers, a light-emitting layer containing a light-emitting substance that emits red (R) light, a light-emitting layer containing a light-emitting substance that emits green (G) light, and a light-emitting layer that emits blue light. It is preferable to have a light-emitting layer having a light-emitting substance (B) that emits light.
- the stacking order of the light-emitting layers can be R, G, B from the anode side, or R, B, G, etc. from the anode side.
- a buffer layer may be provided between R and G or B.
- a light-emitting device with a single structure has two light-emitting layers, it has a light-emitting layer containing a light-emitting substance that emits blue (B) light and a light-emitting layer containing a light-emitting substance that emits yellow (Y) light. configuration is preferred.
- This structure is sometimes called a BY single structure.
- a light-emitting device that emits white light preferably contains two or more types of light-emitting substances.
- by making the emission color of the first light-emitting layer and the emission color of the second light-emitting layer have a complementary color relationship it is possible to obtain a light-emitting device that emits white light as a whole.
- a structure in which white light is emitted by mixing the light emitted from each of the light-emitting substances can be employed.
- the layer 780 and the layer 790 may each independently have a laminated structure consisting of two or more layers.
- the light emitting layer 771 and the light emitting layer 772 may be made of a light emitting material that emits light of the same color, or even the same light emitting material.
- a light-emitting substance that emits blue light may be used for each of the light-emitting layers 771 and 772 .
- blue light emitted by the light-emitting device can be extracted.
- a color conversion layer is provided as layer 764 shown in FIG. and can extract red or green light.
- both a color conversion layer and a colored layer are preferably used.
- a light-emitting device having the configuration shown in FIG. 49E or FIG. 49F is used for sub-pixels that emit light of each color
- different light-emitting materials may be used depending on the sub-pixels.
- a light-emitting substance that emits red light may be used for each of the light-emitting layers 771 and 772 .
- a light-emitting substance that emits green light may be used for each of the light-emitting layers 771 and 772 .
- a light-emitting substance that emits blue light may be used for each of the light-emitting layers 771 and 772 . It can be said that the display device having such a configuration employs a tandem structure light emitting device and has an SBS structure. Therefore, it is possible to have both the merit of the tandem structure and the merit of the SBS structure. As a result, a highly reliable light-emitting device capable of emitting light with high brightness can be realized.
- light-emitting substances with different emission colors may be used for the light-emitting layers 771 and 772 .
- the light emitted from the light-emitting layer 771 and the light emitted from the light-emitting layer 772 are complementary colors, white light emission is obtained.
- a color filter may be provided as layer 764 shown in FIG. 49F. A desired color of light can be obtained by passing the white light through the color filter.
- FIGS. 49E and 49F show an example in which the light emitting unit 763a has one light emitting layer 771 and the light emitting unit 763b has one light emitting layer 772, but the present invention is not limited to this.
- Each of the light-emitting unit 763a and the light-emitting unit 763b may have two or more light-emitting layers.
- FIGS. 49E and 49F exemplify a light-emitting device having two light-emitting units
- a light emitting device may have three or more light emitting units.
- a structure having two light-emitting units may be called a two-stage tandem structure, and a structure having three light-emitting units may be called a three-stage tandem structure.
- light-emitting unit 763a has layer 780a, light-emitting layer 771, and layer 790a
- light-emitting unit 763b has layer 780b, light-emitting layer 772, and layer 790b.
- layers 780a and 780b each have one or more of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, and an electron blocking layer.
- layers 790a and 790b each include one or more of an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, and a hole blocking layer. If the bottom electrode 761 is the cathode and the top electrode 762 is the anode, then layers 780a and 790a would have the opposite arrangement, and layers 780b and 790b would also have the opposite arrangement.
- layer 780a has a hole-injection layer and a hole-transport layer over the hole-injection layer, and further includes a hole-transport layer. It may have an electron blocking layer on the layer.
- Layer 790a also has an electron-transporting layer and may also have a hole-blocking layer between the light-emitting layer 771 and the electron-transporting layer.
- Layer 780b also has a hole transport layer and may also have an electron blocking layer on the hole transport layer.
- Layer 790b also has an electron-transporting layer, an electron-injecting layer on the electron-transporting layer, and may also have a hole-blocking layer between the light-emitting layer 772 and the electron-transporting layer. If the bottom electrode 761 is the cathode and the top electrode 762 is the anode, for example, layer 780a has an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer on the electron injection layer, and a positive electrode on the electron transport layer. It may have a pore blocking layer. Layer 790a also has a hole-transporting layer and may also have an electron-blocking layer between the light-emitting layer 771 and the hole-transporting layer.
- Layer 780b also has an electron-transporting layer and may also have a hole-blocking layer on the electron-transporting layer.
- Layer 790b may also have a hole-transporting layer, a hole-injecting layer on the hole-transporting layer, and an electron-blocking layer between the light-emitting layer 772 and the hole-transporting layer. good.
- two light-emitting units are stacked with the charge generation layer 785 interposed therebetween.
- Charge generation layer 785 has at least a charge generation region.
- the charge-generating layer 785 has a function of injecting electrons into one of the two light-emitting units and holes into the other when a voltage is applied between the pair of electrodes.
- An example of a tandem-structured light-emitting device includes the configurations shown in FIGS. 50A to 50C.
- FIG. 50A shows a configuration having three light emitting units.
- a plurality of light-emitting units (light-emitting unit 763a, light-emitting unit 763b, and light-emitting unit 763c) are connected in series via charge generation layers 785, respectively.
- Light-emitting unit 763a includes layer 780a, light-emitting layer 771, and layer 790a
- light-emitting unit 763b includes layer 780b, light-emitting layer 772, and layer 790b
- light-emitting unit 763c includes , a layer 780c, a light-emitting layer 773, and a layer 790c.
- a structure applicable to the layers 780a and 780b can be used for the layer 780c
- a structure applicable to the layers 790a and 790b can be used for the layer 790c.
- light-emitting layers 771, 772, and 773 preferably have light-emitting substances that emit light of the same color.
- the light-emitting layer 771, the light-emitting layer 772, and the light-emitting layer 773 each include a red (R) light-emitting substance (so-called three-stage tandem structure of R ⁇ R ⁇ R), the light-emitting layer 771, and the light-emitting layer 772 and 773 each include a green (G) light-emitting substance (so-called G ⁇ G ⁇ G three-stage tandem structure), or the light-emitting layers 771, 772, and 773 each include a blue light-emitting layer.
- R red
- G green
- a structure (B) including a light-emitting substance (a so-called three-stage tandem structure of B ⁇ B ⁇ B) can be employed.
- a ⁇ b means that a light-emitting unit having a light-emitting substance that emits light b is provided over a light-emitting unit that has a light-emitting substance that emits light a through a charge generation layer.
- a, b denote colors.
- light-emitting substances with different emission colors may be used for part or all of the light-emitting layer 771, light-emitting layer 772, and light-emitting layer 773.
- the combination of the emission colors of the light-emitting layer 771, the light-emitting layer 772, and the light-emitting layer 773 is, for example, a configuration in which any two are blue (B) and the remaining one is yellow (Y), and any one is red (R ), the other one is green (G), and the remaining one is blue (B).
- FIG. 50B shows a configuration in which two light-emitting units (light-emitting unit 763a and light-emitting unit 763b) are connected in series via a charge generation layer 785.
- the light-emitting unit 763a includes a layer 780a, a light-emitting layer 771a, a light-emitting layer 771b, a light-emitting layer 771c, and a layer 790a. and a light-emitting layer 772c and a layer 790b.
- the light-emitting unit 763a is configured to emit white light (W).
- the light-emitting unit 763b can emit white light (W). That is, the configuration shown in FIG. 50B is a two-stage tandem structure of W ⁇ W.
- stacking order of the respective light-emitting substances there is no particular limitation on the stacking order of the respective light-emitting substances. A practitioner can appropriately select the optimum stacking order. Although not shown, a three-stage tandem structure of W ⁇ W ⁇ W or a tandem structure of four or more stages may be employed.
- a tandem structure light-emitting device When using a tandem structure light-emitting device, a two-stage tandem structure of B ⁇ Y or Y ⁇ B having a light-emitting unit that emits yellow (Y) light and a light-emitting unit that emits blue (B) light, red (R ) and green (G) light, and a two-stage tandem structure of R ⁇ G ⁇ B or B ⁇ R ⁇ G having a light-emitting unit that emits blue (B) light, blue (B) light , a light-emitting unit that emits yellow (Y) light, and a light-emitting unit that emits blue (B) light, in this order.
- a three-stage tandem structure of B ⁇ YG ⁇ B having, in this order, a light-emitting unit that emits light, a light-emitting unit that emits yellow-green (YG) light, and a light-emitting unit that emits blue (B) light.
- a light-emitting unit that emits light
- a light-emitting unit that emits yellow-green (YG) light
- green (G) light-emitting light emitting unit, and blue (B) light-emitting unit in this order such as a three-stage tandem structure of B ⁇ G ⁇ B.
- a ⁇ b means that one light-emitting unit includes a light-emitting substance that emits light a and a light-emitting substance that emits light b.
- a light-emitting unit having one light-emitting layer and a light-emitting unit having multiple light-emitting layers may be combined.
- a plurality of light-emitting units (light-emitting unit 763a, light-emitting unit 763b, and light-emitting unit 763c) are connected in series via charge generation layers 785, respectively.
- Light-emitting unit 763a includes layer 780a, light-emitting layer 771, and layer 790a
- light-emitting unit 763b includes layer 780b, light-emitting layer 772a, light-emitting layer 772b, light-emitting layer 772c, and layer 790b.
- the light-emitting unit 763c includes a layer 780c, a light-emitting layer 773, and a layer 790c.
- the light-emitting unit 763a is a light-emitting unit that emits blue (B) light
- the light-emitting unit 763b emits red (R), green (G), and yellow-green (YG) light.
- a three-stage tandem structure of B ⁇ R, G, and YG ⁇ B, in which the light-emitting unit 763c is a light-emitting unit that emits blue (B) light, or the like can be applied.
- the order of the number of stacked light-emitting units and the colors is as follows: from the anode side, a two-stage structure of B and Y; a two-stage structure of B and light-emitting unit X; a three-stage structure of B, Y, and B; , B, and the order of the number of layers of light-emitting layers and the colors in the light-emitting unit X is, from the anode side, a two-layer structure of R and Y, a two-layer structure of R and G, and a two-layer structure of G and R.
- a two-layer structure, a three-layer structure of G, R, and G, or a three-layer structure of R, G, and R can be used.
- another layer may be provided between the two light-emitting layers.
- a conductive film that transmits visible light is used for the electrode on the light extraction side of the lower electrode 761 and the upper electrode 762 .
- a conductive film that reflects visible light is preferably used for the electrode on the side from which light is not extracted.
- the display device has a light-emitting device that emits infrared light
- a conductive film that transmits visible light and infrared light is used for the electrode on the side from which light is extracted
- a conductive film is used for the electrode on the side that does not extract light.
- a conductive film that reflects visible light and infrared light is preferably used.
- a conductive film that transmits visible light may also be used for the electrode on the side that does not take out light.
- the electrode is preferably placed between the reflective layer and the EL layer 763 . That is, the light emitted from the EL layer 763 may be reflected by the reflective layer and extracted from the display device.
- metals, alloys, electrically conductive compounds, mixtures thereof, and the like can be used as appropriate.
- specific examples of such materials include aluminum, magnesium, titanium, chromium, manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, copper, gallium, zinc, indium, tin, molybdenum, tantalum, tungsten, palladium, gold, platinum, silver, Examples include metals such as yttrium and neodymium, and alloys containing these in appropriate combinations.
- the material includes indium tin oxide (also referred to as In—Sn oxide, ITO), In—Si—Sn oxide (also referred to as ITSO), indium zinc oxide (In—Zn oxide), and In -W-Zn oxide and the like can be mentioned.
- the material includes an alloy containing aluminum (aluminum alloy) such as an alloy of aluminum, nickel, and lanthanum (Al-Ni-La), an alloy of silver and magnesium, and an alloy of silver, palladium and copper.
- An alloy containing silver such as (Ag-Pd-Cu, also referred to as APC) can be mentioned.
- elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the periodic table of elements not exemplified above e.g., lithium, cesium, calcium, strontium
- europium e.g., europium
- rare earth metals such as ytterbium
- appropriate combinations of these alloy containing, graphene, and the like e.g., graphene, graphene, and the like.
- a micro optical resonator (microcavity) structure is preferably applied to the light emitting device. Therefore, one of the pair of electrodes included in the light-emitting device is preferably an electrode (semi-transmissive/semi-reflective electrode) that is transparent and reflective to visible light, and the other is an electrode that is reflective to visible light ( reflective electrode). Since the light-emitting device has a microcavity structure, the light emitted from the light-emitting layer can be resonated between both electrodes, and the light emitted from the light-emitting device can be enhanced.
- the semi-transmissive/semi-reflective electrode has a laminated structure of a conductive layer that can be used as a reflective electrode and a conductive layer that can be used as an electrode that transmits visible light (also referred to as a transparent electrode). can be done.
- the light transmittance of the transparent electrode is set to 40% or more.
- an electrode having a transmittance of 40% or more for visible light (light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more and less than 750 nm) as the transparent electrode of the light emitting device.
- the visible light reflectance of the semi-transmissive/semi-reflective electrode is 10% or more and 95% or less, preferably 30% or more and 80% or less.
- the visible light reflectance of the reflective electrode is 40% or more and 100% or less, preferably 70% or more and 100% or less.
- the resistivity of these electrodes is preferably 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 ⁇ cm or less.
- a light-emitting device has at least a light-emitting layer. Further, in the light-emitting device, as layers other than the light-emitting layer, a material with high hole-injection property, a material with high hole-transport property, a hole-blocking material, a material with high electron-transport property, an electron-blocking material, and a material with high electron-injection property A layer containing a material, a bipolar material (a material with high electron-transport properties and high hole-transport properties), or the like may be further included.
- the light-emitting device has, in addition to the light-emitting layer, one or more of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a hole blocking layer, a charge generation layer, an electron blocking layer, an electron transport layer, and an electron injection layer. can be configured.
- Both low-molecular-weight compounds and high-molecular-weight compounds can be used in the light-emitting device, and inorganic compounds may be included.
- Each of the layers constituting the light-emitting device can be formed by a vapor deposition method (including a vacuum vapor deposition method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, a coating method, or the like.
- the luminescent layer has one or more luminescent substances.
- a substance emitting light of blue, purple, blue-violet, green, yellow-green, yellow, orange, red, or the like is used as appropriate.
- a substance that emits near-infrared light can be used as the light-emitting substance.
- Luminous materials include fluorescent materials, phosphorescent materials, TADF materials, and quantum dot materials.
- fluorescent materials include pyrene derivatives, anthracene derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, fluorene derivatives, carbazole derivatives, dibenzothiophene derivatives, dibenzofuran derivatives, dibenzoquinoxaline derivatives, quinoxaline derivatives, pyridine derivatives, pyrimidine derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, and naphthalene derivatives. mentioned.
- Examples of phosphorescent materials include organometallic complexes (especially iridium complexes) having a 4H-triazole skeleton, 1H-triazole skeleton, imidazole skeleton, pyrimidine skeleton, pyrazine skeleton, or pyridine skeleton, and phenylpyridine derivatives having an electron-withdrawing group.
- organometallic complexes especially iridium complexes
- platinum complexes, rare earth metal complexes, and the like, which serve as ligands, can be mentioned.
- the light-emitting layer may contain one or more organic compounds (host material, assist material, etc.) in addition to the light-emitting substance (guest material).
- One or both of a highly hole-transporting material (hole-transporting material) and a highly electron-transporting material (electron-transporting material) can be used as the one or more organic compounds.
- a highly hole-transporting material hole-transporting material
- a highly electron-transporting material electron-transporting material
- electron-transporting material a material having a high electron-transporting property that can be used for the electron-transporting layer, which will be described later, can be used.
- Bipolar materials or TADF materials may also be used as one or more organic compounds.
- the light-emitting layer preferably includes, for example, a phosphorescent material and a combination of a hole-transporting material and an electron-transporting material that easily form an exciplex.
- ExTET Exciplex-Triplet Energy Transfer
- a combination that forms an exciplex that emits light that overlaps with the wavelength of the absorption band on the lowest energy side of the light-emitting substance energy transfer becomes smooth and light emission can be efficiently obtained. With this configuration, high efficiency, low-voltage driving, and long life of the light-emitting device can be realized at the same time.
- the hole-injecting layer is a layer that injects holes from the anode into the hole-transporting layer, and contains a material with high hole-injecting properties.
- highly hole-injecting materials include aromatic amine compounds and composite materials containing a hole-transporting material and an acceptor material (electron-accepting material).
- hole-transporting material a material having a high hole-transporting property that can be used for the hole-transporting layer, which will be described later, can be used.
- oxides of metals belonging to groups 4 to 8 in the periodic table can be used.
- Specific examples include molybdenum oxide, vanadium oxide, niobium oxide, tantalum oxide, chromium oxide, tungsten oxide, manganese oxide, and rhenium oxide.
- molybdenum oxide is particularly preferred because it is stable even in the atmosphere, has low hygroscopicity, and is easy to handle.
- An organic acceptor material containing fluorine can also be used.
- Organic acceptor materials such as quinodimethane derivatives, chloranil derivatives, and hexaazatriphenylene derivatives can also be used.
- a material with a high hole-injection property a material containing a hole-transporting material and an oxide of a metal belonging to Groups 4 to 8 in the above-described periodic table (typically molybdenum oxide) is used. may be used.
- the hole-transporting layer is a layer that transports holes injected from the anode to the light-emitting layer by means of the hole-injecting layer.
- a hole-transporting layer is a layer containing a hole-transporting material.
- a material having a hole mobility of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 cm 2 /Vs or more is preferable as the hole-transporting material. Note that materials other than these can also be used as long as they have higher hole-transport properties than electron-transport properties.
- hole-transporting materials include ⁇ -electron-rich heteroaromatic compounds (e.g., carbazole derivatives, thiophene derivatives, furan derivatives, etc.), aromatic amines (compounds having an aromatic amine skeleton), and other highly hole-transporting materials. is preferred.
- ⁇ -electron-rich heteroaromatic compounds e.g., carbazole derivatives, thiophene derivatives, furan derivatives, etc.
- aromatic amines compounds having an aromatic amine skeleton
- other highly hole-transporting materials is preferred.
- the electron blocking layer is provided in contact with the light emitting layer.
- the electron blocking layer is a layer containing a material capable of transporting holes and blocking electrons.
- a material having an electron blocking property can be used among the above hole-transporting materials.
- the electron blocking layer has hole transport properties, it can also be called a hole transport layer. Moreover, the layer which has electron blocking property can also be called an electron blocking layer among hole transport layers.
- the electron-transporting layer is a layer that transports electrons injected from the cathode to the light-emitting layer by the electron-injecting layer.
- the electron-transporting layer is a layer containing an electron-transporting material.
- an electron-transporting material a substance having an electron mobility of 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 cm 2 /Vs or more is preferable. Note that materials other than these can also be used as long as they have higher electron-transport properties than hole-transport properties.
- electron-transporting materials include metal complexes having a quinoline skeleton, metal complexes having a benzoquinoline skeleton, metal complexes having an oxazole skeleton, metal complexes having a thiazole skeleton, oxadiazole derivatives, triazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, ⁇ electron deficient including oxazole derivatives, thiazole derivatives, phenanthroline derivatives, quinoline derivatives with quinoline ligands, benzoquinoline derivatives, quinoxaline derivatives, dibenzoquinoxaline derivatives, pyridine derivatives, bipyridine derivatives, pyrimidine derivatives, and other nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic compounds
- a material having a high electron transport property such as a type heteroaromatic compound can be used.
- the hole blocking layer is provided in contact with the light emitting layer.
- the hole-blocking layer is a layer containing a material that has electron-transport properties and can block holes. Among the above electron-transporting materials, materials having hole-blocking properties can be used for the hole-blocking layer.
- the hole-blocking layer can also be called an electron-transporting layer because it has electron-transporting properties. Moreover, among the electron transport layers, a layer having hole blocking properties can also be referred to as a hole blocking layer.
- the electron injection layer is a layer that injects electrons from the cathode to the electron transport layer, and is a layer that contains a material with high electron injection properties.
- Alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, or compounds thereof can be used as materials with high electron injection properties.
- a composite material containing an electron-transporting material and a donor material (electron-donating material) can also be used as a material with high electron-injecting properties.
- the LUMO level of the material with high electron injection properties preferably has a small difference (specifically, 0.5 eV or less) from the value of the work function of the material used for the cathode.
- the electron injection layer includes, for example, lithium, cesium, ytterbium, lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), calcium fluoride (CaF x , X is an arbitrary number), 8-(quinolinolato)lithium (abbreviation: Liq), 2-(2-pyridyl)phenoratritium (abbreviation: LiPP), 2-(2-pyridyl)-3-pyridinolatritium (abbreviation: LiPPy), 4-phenyl-2-(2-pyridyl)pheno Alkali metals such as latolithium (abbreviation: LiPPP), lithium oxide (LiO x ), cesium carbonate, alkaline earth metals, or compounds thereof can be used.
- the electron injection layer may have a laminated structure of two or more layers. Examples of the laminated structure include a structure in which lithium fluoride is used for the first layer and ytterbium is provided for the second layer.
- the electron injection layer may have an electron-transporting material.
- a compound having a lone pair of electrons and an electron-deficient heteroaromatic ring can be used as the electron-transporting material.
- a compound having at least one of a pyridine ring, diazine ring (pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, pyridazine ring), and triazine ring can be used.
- the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) level of an organic compound having an unshared electron pair is preferably -3.6 eV or more and -2.3 eV or less.
- CV cyclic voltammetry
- photoelectron spectroscopy optical absorption spectroscopy
- inverse photoelectron spectroscopy etc. are used to determine the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO: Highest Occupied Molecular Orbital) level and LUMO level of an organic compound. can be estimated.
- BPhen 4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline
- NBPhen 2,9-di(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline
- HATNA diquinoxalino [2,3-a:2′,3′-c]phenazine
- TmPPPyTz 2,4,6-tris[3′-(pyridin-3-yl)biphenyl-3-yl]-1,3 , 5-triazine
- the charge generation layer has at least a charge generation region as described above.
- the charge generation region preferably contains an acceptor material, for example, preferably contains a hole transport material and an acceptor material applicable to the hole injection layer described above.
- the charge generation layer preferably has a layer containing a material with high electron injection properties. This layer can also be called an electron injection buffer layer.
- the electron injection buffer layer is preferably provided between the charge generation region and the electron transport layer. Since the injection barrier between the charge generation region and the electron transport layer can be relaxed by providing the electron injection buffer layer, electrons generated in the charge generation region can be easily injected into the electron transport layer.
- the electron injection buffer layer preferably contains an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal, and can be configured to contain, for example, an alkali metal compound or an alkaline earth metal compound.
- the electron injection buffer layer preferably has an inorganic compound containing an alkali metal and oxygen, or an inorganic compound containing an alkaline earth metal and oxygen. Lithium (Li 2 O), etc.) is more preferred.
- the above materials applicable to the electron injection layer can be preferably used.
- the charge generation layer preferably has a layer containing a material with high electron transport properties. Such layers may also be referred to as electron relay layers.
- the electron relay layer is preferably provided between the charge generation region and the electron injection buffer layer. If the charge generation layer does not have an electron injection buffer layer, the electron relay layer is preferably provided between the charge generation region and the electron transport layer.
- the electron relay layer has a function of smoothly transferring electrons by preventing interaction between the charge generation region and the electron injection buffer layer (or electron transport layer).
- a phthalocyanine-based material such as copper (II) phthalocyanine (abbreviation: CuPc), or a metal complex having a metal-oxygen bond and an aromatic ligand.
- charge generation region the electron injection buffer layer, and the electron relay layer described above may not be clearly distinguishable depending on their cross-sectional shape or characteristics.
- the charge generation layer may have a donor material instead of the acceptor material.
- the charge-generating layer may have a layer containing an electron-transporting material and a donor material, which are applicable to the electron-injecting layer described above.
- the light receiving device has a layer 765 between a pair of electrodes (lower electrode 761 and upper electrode 762).
- Layer 765 has at least one active layer and may have other layers.
- FIG. 51B is a modification of the layer 765 included in the light receiving device shown in FIG. 51A. Specifically, the light-receiving device shown in FIG. have.
- the active layer 767 functions as a photoelectric conversion layer.
- the layer 766 has one or both of a hole transport layer and an electron blocking layer.
- Layer 768 also includes one or both of an electron-transporting layer and a hole-blocking layer.
- Both low-molecular-weight compounds and high-molecular-weight compounds can be used in the light-receiving device, and inorganic compounds may be included.
- the layers constituting the light-receiving device can be formed by methods such as a vapor deposition method (including a vacuum vapor deposition method), a transfer method, a printing method, an inkjet method, and a coating method.
- the active layer of the light receiving device contains a semiconductor.
- the semiconductor include inorganic semiconductors such as silicon and organic semiconductors including organic compounds.
- an organic semiconductor is used as the semiconductor included in the active layer.
- the light-emitting layer and the active layer can be formed by the same method (for example, a vacuum deposition method), and a manufacturing apparatus can be shared, which is preferable.
- Electron-accepting organic semiconductor materials such as fullerenes (eg, C 60 , C 70 , etc.) and fullerene derivatives can be used as n-type semiconductor materials for the active layer.
- fullerene derivatives include [6,6]-Phenyl- C71 -butyric acid methyl ester (abbreviation: PC70BM), [6,6]-Phenyl- C61 -butyric acid methyl ester (abbreviation: PC60BM), 1 ',1'',4',4''-Tetrahydro-di[1,4]methanonaphthaleno[1,2:2',3',56,60:2'',3''][5,6] fullerene-C 60 (abbreviation: ICBA) and the like.
- PC70BM [6,6]-Phenyl- C71 -butyric acid methyl ester
- PC60BM [6,6]-Phenyl- C61 -buty
- n-type semiconductor materials include perylenetetracarboxylic acid derivatives such as N,N′-dimethyl-3,4,9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic diimide (abbreviation: Me-PTCDI), and 2,2 '-(5,5'-(thieno[3,2-b]thiophene-2,5-diyl)bis(thiophene-5,2-diyl))bis(methan-1-yl-1-ylidene)dimalononitrile ( abbreviation: FT2TDMN).
- Me-PTCDI N,N′-dimethyl-3,4,9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic diimide
- FT2TDMN 2,2 '-(5,5'-(thieno[3,2-b]thiophene-2,5-diyl)bis(thiophene-5,2-diyl))bis(methan-1-yl-1-ylidene)dimalon
- n-type semiconductor materials include metal complexes having a quinoline skeleton, metal complexes having a benzoquinoline skeleton, metal complexes having an oxazole skeleton, metal complexes having a thiazole skeleton, oxadiazole derivatives, triazole derivatives, imidazole derivatives, and oxazole derivatives.
- thiazole derivatives phenanthroline derivatives, quinoline derivatives, benzoquinoline derivatives, quinoxaline derivatives, dibenzoquinoxaline derivatives, pyridine derivatives, bipyridine derivatives, pyrimidine derivatives, naphthalene derivatives, anthracene derivatives, coumarin derivatives, rhodamine derivatives, triazine derivatives, and quinone derivatives, etc. is mentioned.
- Materials for the p-type semiconductor of the active layer include copper (II) phthalocyanine (CuPc), tetraphenyldibenzoperiflanthene (DBP), zinc phthalocyanine (ZnPc), and tin phthalocyanine. (SnPc), quinacridone, and electron-donating organic semiconductor materials such as rubrene.
- Examples of p-type semiconductor materials include carbazole derivatives, thiophene derivatives, furan derivatives, and compounds having an aromatic amine skeleton.
- materials for p-type semiconductors include naphthalene derivatives, anthracene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, fluorene derivatives, pyrrole derivatives, benzofuran derivatives, benzothiophene derivatives, indole derivatives, dibenzofuran derivatives, dibenzothiophene derivatives, indolocarbazole derivatives, porphyrin derivatives, phthalocyanine derivatives, naphthalocyanine derivatives, quinacridone derivatives, rubrene derivatives, tetracene derivatives, polyphenylenevinylene derivatives, polyparaphenylene derivatives, polyfluorene derivatives, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, and polythiophene derivatives.
- the HOMO level of the electron-donating organic semiconductor material is preferably shallower (higher) than the HOMO level of the electron-accepting organic semiconductor material.
- the LUMO level of the electron-donating organic semiconductor material is preferably shallower (higher) than the LUMO level of the electron-accepting organic semiconductor material.
- a spherical fullerene as the electron-accepting organic semiconductor material, and use an organic semiconductor material with a shape close to a plane as the electron-donating organic semiconductor material. Molecules with similar shapes tend to gather together, and when molecules of the same type aggregate, the energy levels of the molecular orbitals are close to each other, so the carrier transportability can be enhanced.
- PBDB-T polymer compound such as a PBDB-T derivative
- a method of dispersing an acceptor material in PBDB-T or a PBDB-T derivative can be used.
- the active layer is preferably formed by co-depositing an n-type semiconductor and a p-type semiconductor.
- the active layer may be formed by laminating an n-type semiconductor and a p-type semiconductor.
- a third material may be mixed in addition to the n-type semiconductor material and the p-type semiconductor material.
- the third material may be a low-molecular compound or a high-molecular compound.
- the light-receiving device further includes, as layers other than the active layer, a layer containing a highly hole-transporting material, a highly electron-transporting material, or a bipolar material (materials with high electron-transporting and hole-transporting properties). may have.
- the layer is not limited to the above, and may further include a layer containing a highly hole-injecting material, a hole-blocking material, a highly electron-injecting material, an electron-blocking material, or the like.
- materials that can be used in the above-described light-emitting device can be used.
- polymer compounds such as poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)/polystyrene sulfonic acid (abbreviation: PEDOT/PSS), molybdenum oxide, and copper iodide Inorganic compounds such as (CuI) can be used.
- Inorganic compounds such as zinc oxide (ZnO) and organic compounds such as polyethyleneimine ethoxylate (PEIE) can be used as the electron-transporting material or the hole-blocking material.
- the light receiving device may have, for example, a mixed film of PEIE and ZnO.
- Display Device Having Photodetection Function
- light-emitting devices are arranged in matrix in the display portion, and an image can be displayed on the display portion.
- light receiving devices are arranged in a matrix in the display section, and the display section has one or both of an imaging function and a sensing function in addition to an image display function.
- the display part can be used for an image sensor or a touch sensor. That is, by detecting light on the display portion, an image can be captured, or proximity or contact of an object (a finger, hand, pen, or the like) can be detected.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can use a light-emitting device as a light source of a sensor.
- the light-receiving device can detect the reflected light (or scattered light).
- imaging or touch detection is possible.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes a light-emitting device and a light-receiving device in a pixel.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention uses an organic EL device as a light-emitting device and an organic photodiode as a light-receiving device.
- An organic EL device and an organic photodiode can be formed on the same substrate. Therefore, an organic photodiode can be incorporated in a display device using an organic EL device.
- a display device having a light-emitting device and a light-receiving device in a pixel, since the pixel has a light-receiving function, it is possible to detect contact or proximity of an object while displaying an image. For example, not only can an image be displayed by all the sub-pixels of the display device, but also some sub-pixels can emit light as a light source and the remaining sub-pixels can be used to display an image.
- the display device can capture an image using the light receiving device.
- the display device of this embodiment can be used as a scanner.
- an image sensor can be used to capture images for personal authentication using fingerprints, palm prints, irises, pulse shapes (including vein shapes and artery shapes), or faces.
- an image sensor can be used to capture an image around the eye, the surface of the eye, or the inside of the eye (such as the fundus) of the user of the wearable device. Therefore, the wearable device can have a function of detecting any one or more selected from the user's blink, black eye movement, and eyelid movement.
- the light-receiving device can be used as a touch sensor (also called a direct touch sensor) or a near-touch sensor (also called a hover sensor, hover touch sensor, non-contact sensor, or touchless sensor).
- a touch sensor also called a direct touch sensor
- a near-touch sensor also called a hover sensor, hover touch sensor, non-contact sensor, or touchless sensor.
- the touch sensor or near-touch sensor can detect the proximity or contact of an object (finger, hand, pen, etc.).
- a touch sensor can detect an object by bringing the display device into direct contact with the object.
- the near-touch sensor can detect the object even if the object does not touch the display device.
- the display device can detect the object when the distance between the display device and the object is 0.1 mm or more and 300 mm or less, preferably 3 mm or more and 50 mm or less.
- the display device can be operated without direct contact with the object, in other words, the display device can be operated without contact.
- the risk of staining or scratching the display device can be reduced, or the object can be displayed without directly touching the stain (for example, dust or virus) attached to the display device. It becomes possible to operate the device.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have a variable refresh rate.
- the power consumption can be reduced by adjusting the refresh rate (for example, in the range of 1 Hz to 240 Hz) according to the content displayed on the display device.
- the drive frequency of the touch sensor or the near-touch sensor may be changed according to the refresh rate. For example, when the refresh rate of the display device is 120 Hz, the driving frequency of the touch sensor or the near-touch sensor can be higher than 120 Hz (typically 240 Hz). With this structure, low power consumption can be achieved and the response speed of the touch sensor or the near touch sensor can be increased.
- a display device 100 shown in FIGS. 51C to 51E has a layer 353 having a light receiving device, a functional layer 355, and a layer 357 having a light emitting device between a substrate 351 and a substrate 359.
- FIG. 51C to 51E has a layer 353 having a light receiving device, a functional layer 355, and a layer 357 having a light emitting device between a substrate 351 and a substrate 359.
- the functional layer 355 has a circuit for driving the light receiving device and a circuit for driving the light emitting device.
- One or more of switches, transistors, capacitors, resistors, wirings, terminals, and the like can be provided in the functional layer 355 . Note that in the case of driving the light-emitting device and the light-receiving device by a passive matrix method, a structure in which the switch and the transistor are not provided may be employed.
- a finger 352 touching the display device 100 reflects light emitted by a light-emitting device in a layer 357 having a light-emitting device, so that a light-receiving device in a layer 353 having a light-receiving device reflects the light. Detect light. Thereby, it is possible to detect that the finger 352 touches the display device 100 .
- FIGS. 51D and 51E it may have a function of detecting or imaging an object that is close to (not in contact with) the display device.
- FIG. 51D shows an example of detecting a finger of a person
- FIG. 51E shows an example of detecting information around, on the surface of, or inside the human eye (number of blinks, eyeball movement, eyelid movement, etc.).
- An electronic device of this embodiment includes the display device of one embodiment of the present invention in a display portion.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can easily have high definition and high resolution. Therefore, it can be used for display portions of various electronic devices.
- Examples of electronic devices include televisions, desktop or notebook personal computers, monitors for computers, digital signage, large game machines such as pachinko machines, and other electronic devices with relatively large screens. Examples include cameras, digital video cameras, digital photo frames, mobile phones, mobile game machines, mobile information terminals, and sound reproducing devices.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can have high definition, it can be suitably used for an electronic device having a relatively small display portion.
- electronic devices include wristwatch-type and bracelet-type information terminals (wearable devices), VR devices such as head-mounted displays, glasses-type AR devices, and MR devices.
- wearable devices include wristwatch-type and bracelet-type information terminals (wearable devices), VR devices such as head-mounted displays, glasses-type AR devices, and MR devices.
- a wearable device that can be attached to a part is exemplified.
- a display device of one embodiment of the present invention includes HD (1280 ⁇ 720 pixels), FHD (1920 ⁇ 1080 pixels), WQHD (2560 ⁇ 1440 pixels), WQXGA (2560 ⁇ 1600 pixels), 4K (2560 ⁇ 1600 pixels), 3840 ⁇ 2160) and 8K (7680 ⁇ 4320 pixels).
- the resolution it is preferable to set the resolution to 4K, 8K, or higher.
- the pixel density (definition) of the display device of one embodiment of the present invention is preferably 100 ppi or more, preferably 300 ppi or more, more preferably 500 ppi or more, more preferably 1000 ppi or more, more preferably 2000 ppi or more, and 3000 ppi or more.
- the display device can support various screen ratios such as 1:1 (square), 4:3, 16:9, 16:10.
- the electronic device of this embodiment includes sensors (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, number of revolutions, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substance, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage , power, radiation, flow, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared sensing, detection or measurement).
- the electronic device of this embodiment can have various functions. For example, functions to display various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit, touch panel functions, calendars, functions to display the date or time, functions to execute various software (programs), wireless communication function, a function of reading a program or data recorded on a recording medium, and the like.
- FIGS. 52A to 52D An example of a wearable device that can be worn on the head will be described with reference to FIGS. 52A to 52D.
- These wearable devices have at least one of a function of displaying AR content, a function of displaying VR content, a function of displaying SR content, and a function of displaying MR content.
- the electronic device has a function of displaying at least one content such as AR, VR, SR, and MR, it is possible to enhance the immersive feeling of the user.
- Electronic device 700A shown in FIG. 52A and electronic device 700B shown in FIG. It has a control section (not shown), an imaging section (not shown), a pair of optical members 753 , a frame 757 and a pair of nose pads 758 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display panel 751 . Therefore, the electronic device can display images with extremely high definition.
- the electronic device 700A and the electronic device 700B can each project an image displayed on the display panel 751 onto the display area 756 of the optical member 753. Since the optical member 753 has translucency, the user can see the image displayed in the display area superimposed on the transmitted image visually recognized through the optical member 753 . Therefore, the electronic device 700A and the electronic device 700B are electronic devices capable of AR display.
- the electronic device 700A and the electronic device 700B may be provided with a camera capable of capturing an image in front as an imaging unit. Further, the electronic devices 700A and 700B each include an acceleration sensor such as a gyro sensor to detect the orientation of the user's head and display an image corresponding to the orientation in the display area 756. You can also
- the communication unit has a wireless communication device, and can supply video signals, etc. by the wireless communication device.
- a connector to which a cable to which a video signal and a power supply potential are supplied may be provided.
- a battery is provided in the electronic device 700A and the electronic device 700B, and can be charged wirelessly and/or wiredly.
- the housing 721 may be provided with a touch sensor module.
- the touch sensor module has a function of detecting that the outer surface of the housing 721 is touched.
- the touch sensor module can detect a user's tap operation or slide operation and execute various processes. For example, it is possible to perform processing such as pausing or resuming a moving image by a tap operation, and fast-forward or fast-reverse processing can be performed by a slide operation. Further, by providing a touch sensor module for each of the two housings 721, the range of operations can be expanded.
- Various touch sensors can be applied as the touch sensor module.
- various methods such as a capacitance method, a resistive film method, an infrared method, an electromagnetic induction method, a surface acoustic wave method, and an optical method can be adopted.
- a photoelectric conversion device (also referred to as a photoelectric conversion element) can be used as the light receiving device.
- a photoelectric conversion device also referred to as a photoelectric conversion element
- One or both of an inorganic semiconductor and an organic semiconductor can be used for the active layer of the photoelectric conversion device.
- Electronic device 800A shown in FIG. 52C and electronic device 800B shown in FIG. It has a pair of imaging units 825 and a pair of lenses 832 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 820 . Therefore, the electronic device can display images with extremely high definition. This allows the user to feel a high sense of immersion.
- the display unit 820 is provided inside the housing 821 at a position where it can be viewed through the lens 832 . By displaying different images on the pair of display portions 820, three-dimensional display using parallax can be performed.
- Each of the electronic device 800A and the electronic device 800B can be said to be an electronic device for VR.
- a user wearing electronic device 800 ⁇ /b>A or electronic device 800 ⁇ /b>B can view an image displayed on display unit 820 through lens 832 .
- the electronic device 800A and the electronic device 800B each have a mechanism that can adjust the left and right positions of the lens 832 and the display unit 820 so that they are optimally positioned according to the position of the user's eyes. preferably. In addition, it is preferable to have a mechanism for adjusting focus by changing the distance between the lens 832 and the display portion 820 .
- the wearing section 823 allows the user to wear the electronic device 800A or the electronic device 800B on the head.
- the shape is illustrated as a temple of spectacles (also referred to as a temple), but the shape is not limited to this.
- the mounting portion 823 may be worn by the user, and may be, for example, a helmet-type or band-type shape.
- the imaging unit 825 has a function of acquiring external information. Data acquired by the imaging unit 825 can be output to the display unit 820 . An image sensor can be used for the imaging unit 825 . Also, a plurality of cameras may be provided so as to be able to deal with a plurality of angles of view such as telephoto and wide angle.
- a distance measuring sensor capable of measuring the distance of an object
- the imaging unit 825 is one aspect of the detection unit.
- the detection unit for example, an image sensor or a distance image sensor such as LIDAR (Light Detection and Ranging) can be used.
- LIDAR Light Detection and Ranging
- the electronic device 800A may have a vibration mechanism that functions as bone conduction earphones.
- a vibration mechanism that functions as bone conduction earphones.
- one or more of the display portion 820, the housing 821, and the mounting portion 823 can be provided with the vibration mechanism.
- the user can enjoy video and audio simply by wearing the electronic device 800A without the need for separate audio equipment such as headphones, earphones, or speakers.
- the electronic device 800A and the electronic device 800B may each have an input terminal.
- the input terminal can be connected to a cable that supplies a video signal from a video output device or the like and power or the like for charging a battery provided in the electronic device.
- the electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention may have a function of wirelessly communicating with the earphone 750.
- Earphone 750 has a communication unit (not shown) and has a wireless communication function.
- the earphone 750 can receive information (eg, audio data) from the electronic device by wireless communication function.
- information eg, audio data
- electronic device 700A shown in FIG. 52A has a function of transmitting information to earphone 750 by a wireless communication function.
- electronic device 800A shown in FIG. 52C has a function of transmitting information to earphone 750 by a wireless communication function.
- the electronic device may have an earphone part.
- Electronic device 700B shown in FIG. 52B has earphone section 727 .
- the earphone section 727 and the control section can be configured to be wired to each other.
- a part of the wiring connecting the earphone section 727 and the control section may be arranged inside the housing 721 or the mounting section 723 .
- the electronic device 800B shown in FIG. 52D has an earphone section 827.
- the earphone unit 827 and the control unit 824 can be configured to be wired to each other.
- a part of the wiring connecting the earphone section 827 and the control section 824 may be arranged inside the housing 821 or the mounting section 823 .
- the earphone section 827 and the mounting section 823 may have magnets. Accordingly, the earphone section 827 can be fixed to the mounting section 823 by magnetic force, which is preferable because it facilitates storage.
- the electronic device may have an audio output terminal to which earphones or headphones can be connected. Also, the electronic device may have one or both of an audio input terminal and an audio input mechanism.
- the voice input mechanism for example, a sound collecting device such as a microphone can be used. By providing the electronic device with a voice input mechanism, the electronic device may function as a so-called headset.
- the electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention includes both glasses type (electronic device 700A, electronic device 700B, etc.) and goggle type (electronic device 800A, electronic device 800B, etc.). preferred.
- An electronic device of one embodiment of the present invention can transmit information to earphones by wire or wirelessly.
- An electronic device 6500 shown in FIG. 53A is a mobile information terminal that can be used as a smartphone.
- the electronic device 6500 has a housing 6501, a display unit 6502, a power button 6503, a button 6504, a speaker 6505, a microphone 6506, a camera 6507, a light source 6508, and the like.
- a display portion 6502 has a touch panel function.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 6502 .
- FIG. 53B is a schematic cross-sectional view including the end of the housing 6501 on the microphone 6506 side.
- a light-transmitting protective member 6510 is provided on the display surface side of the housing 6501, and a display panel 6511, an optical member 6512, a touch sensor panel 6513, and a printer are placed in a space surrounded by the housing 6501 and the protective member 6510.
- a substrate 6517, a battery 6518, and the like are arranged.
- a display panel 6511, an optical member 6512, and a touch sensor panel 6513 are fixed to the protective member 6510 with an adhesive layer (not shown).
- a portion of the display panel 6511 is folded back in a region outside the display portion 6502, and the FPC 6515 is connected to the folded portion.
- An IC6516 is mounted on the FPC6515.
- the FPC 6515 is connected to terminals provided on the printed circuit board 6517 .
- the flexible display of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display panel 6511 . Therefore, an extremely lightweight electronic device can be realized. In addition, since the display panel 6511 is extremely thin, the thickness of the electronic device can be reduced and the large-capacity battery 6518 can be mounted. In addition, by folding back part of the display panel 6511 and arranging a connection portion with the FPC 6515 on the back side of the pixel portion, an electronic device with a narrow frame can be realized.
- a television set 7100 has a display portion 7000 incorporated in a housing 7101 .
- a configuration in which a housing 7101 is supported by a stand 7103 is shown.
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000 .
- the operation of the television apparatus 7100 shown in FIG. 53C can be performed using operation switches provided on the housing 7101 and a separate remote control operation device 7111 .
- the display portion 7000 may be provided with a touch sensor, and the television device 7100 may be operated by touching the display portion 7000 with a finger or the like.
- the remote controller 7111 may have a display unit that displays information output from the remote controller 7111 .
- a channel and a volume can be operated with operation keys or a touch panel provided in the remote controller 7111 , and an image displayed on the display portion 7000 can be operated.
- the television device 7100 is configured to include a receiver, a modem, and the like.
- the receiver can receive general television broadcasts. Also, by connecting to a wired or wireless communication network via a modem, one-way (from the sender to the receiver) or two-way (between the sender and the receiver, or between the receivers, etc.) information communication. is also possible.
- FIG. 53D shows an example of a notebook personal computer.
- a notebook personal computer 7200 has a housing 7211, a keyboard 7212, a pointing device 7213, an external connection port 7214, and the like.
- the display portion 7000 is incorporated in the housing 7211 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000 .
- FIGS. 53E and 53F An example of digital signage is shown in FIGS. 53E and 53F.
- a digital signage 7300 shown in FIG. 53E includes a housing 7301, a display unit 7000, speakers 7303, and the like. Furthermore, it can have an LED lamp, an operation key (including a power switch or an operation switch), connection terminals, various sensors, a microphone, and the like.
- FIG. 53F is a digital signage 7400 attached to a cylindrical post 7401.
- a digital signage 7400 has a display section 7000 provided along the curved surface of a pillar 7401 .
- the display device of one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display portion 7000 in FIGS. 53E and 53F.
- the wider the display unit 7000 the more information can be provided at once.
- the wider the display unit 7000 the more conspicuous it is, and the more effective the advertisement can be, for example.
- a touch panel By applying a touch panel to the display unit 7000, not only can images or moving images be displayed on the display unit 7000, but also the user can intuitively operate the display unit 7000, which is preferable. Further, when used for providing information such as route information or traffic information, usability can be enhanced by intuitive operation.
- the digital signage 7300 or digital signage 7400 is preferably capable of cooperating with an information terminal 7311 or information terminal 7411 such as a smartphone possessed by the user through wireless communication.
- advertisement information displayed on the display unit 7000 can be displayed on the screen of the information terminal 7311 or the information terminal 7411 .
- display on the display portion 7000 can be switched.
- the digital signage 7300 or 7400 can execute a game using the screen of the information terminal 7311 or 7411 as an operating means (controller). This allows an unspecified number of users to simultaneously participate in and enjoy the game.
- the electronic device shown in FIGS. 54A to 54G includes a housing 9000, a display unit 9001, a speaker 9003, operation keys 9005 (including a power switch or an operation switch), connection terminals 9006, sensors 9007 (force, displacement, position, speed). , acceleration, angular velocity, number of rotations, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substances, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, smell, or infrared rays , detection or measurement), a microphone 9008, and the like.
- the electronic devices shown in FIGS. 54A to 54G have various functions. For example, a function to display various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit, a touch panel function, a calendar, a function to display the date or time, a function to control processing by various software (programs), It can have a wireless communication function, a function of reading and processing programs or data recorded on a recording medium, and the like. Note that the functions of the electronic device are not limited to these, and can have various functions.
- the electronic device may have a plurality of display units.
- the electronic device may be provided with a camera or the like, and may have a function of capturing a still image or moving image and storing it in a recording medium (external or built into the camera), a function of displaying the captured image on a display unit, and the like. .
- FIGS. 54A to 54G Details of the electronic devices shown in FIGS. 54A to 54G will be described below.
- FIG. 54A is a perspective view showing a mobile information terminal 9101.
- the mobile information terminal 9101 can be used as a smart phone, for example.
- the portable information terminal 9101 may be provided with a speaker 9003, a connection terminal 9006, a sensor 9007, and the like.
- the mobile information terminal 9101 can display text and image information on its multiple surfaces.
- FIG. 54A shows an example in which three icons 9050 are displayed.
- Information 9051 indicated by a dashed rectangle can also be displayed on another surface of the display portion 9001 . Examples of the information 9051 include notification of incoming e-mail, SNS, telephone call, title of e-mail or SNS, sender name, date and time, remaining battery power, radio wave intensity, and the like.
- an icon 9050 or the like may be displayed at the position where the information 9051 is displayed.
- FIG. 54B is a perspective view showing the mobile information terminal 9102.
- the portable information terminal 9102 has a function of displaying information on three or more sides of the display portion 9001 .
- information 9052, information 9053, and information 9054 are displayed on different surfaces.
- the user can confirm the information 9053 displayed at a position where the mobile information terminal 9102 can be viewed from above the mobile information terminal 9102 while the mobile information terminal 9102 is stored in the chest pocket of the clothes.
- the user can check the display without taking out the portable information terminal 9102 from the pocket, and can determine, for example, whether to receive a call.
- the tablet terminal 9103 can execute various applications such as mobile phone, e-mail, reading and creating text, playing music, Internet communication, and computer games.
- the tablet terminal 9103 has a display portion 9001, a camera 9002, a microphone 9008, and a speaker 9003 on the front of the housing 9000, operation keys 9005 as operation buttons on the left side of the housing 9000, and connection terminals on the bottom. 9006.
- FIG. 54D is a perspective view showing a wristwatch-type mobile information terminal 9200.
- the mobile information terminal 9200 can be used as a smart watch (registered trademark), for example.
- the display portion 9001 has a curved display surface, and display can be performed along the curved display surface.
- the mobile information terminal 9200 can also make hands-free calls by mutual communication with a headset capable of wireless communication, for example.
- the portable information terminal 9200 can transmit data to and from another information terminal through the connection terminal 9006, and can be charged. Note that the charging operation may be performed by wireless power supply.
- FIGS. 54E to 54G are perspective views showing a foldable personal digital assistant 9201.
- FIG. 54E is a state in which the portable information terminal 9201 is unfolded
- FIG. 54G is a state in which it is folded
- FIG. 54F is a perspective view in the middle of changing from one of FIGS. 54E and 54G to the other.
- the portable information terminal 9201 has excellent portability in the folded state, and has excellent display visibility due to a seamless wide display area in the unfolded state.
- a display portion 9001 included in the portable information terminal 9201 is supported by three housings 9000 connected by hinges 9055 .
- the display portion 9001 can be bent with a curvature radius of 0.1 mm or more and 150 mm or less.
- sample A the description of the transistor 205R shown in FIG. 11B can be referred to.
- Sample B two types of samples (Sample A and Sample B) were manufactured with different substrate temperatures during the formation of the insulating layer 225 functioning as the first gate insulating layer.
- a tungsten film with a thickness of about 100 nm was formed over the substrate 151 by a sputtering method and processed to obtain a conductive layer 221 functioning as a second gate electrode (bottom gate electrode).
- a glass substrate was used as the substrate 151 .
- an insulating layer 211 functioning as a second gate insulating layer was deposited by plasma CVD.
- the insulating layer 211 used a structure in which a first silicon nitride film with a thickness of about 290 nm, a silicon nitride film with a thickness of about 60 nm, and a silicon oxynitride film with a thickness of about 3 nm were stacked in this order.
- the surface of the second gate insulating layer was removed using 0.5% hydrofluoric acid.
- the hydrofluoric acid treatment was 60 seconds.
- a first metal oxide film having a thickness of about 25 nm was formed and processed to obtain a semiconductor layer 231 .
- a silicon oxynitride film with a thickness of about 100 nm was deposited by plasma CVD as an insulating layer 225 functioning as a first gate insulating layer.
- the substrate temperature during the film formation of the insulating layer 225 was varied among the samples. In sample A, the substrate temperature during formation of the insulating layer 225 was 300.degree. C., and in sample B, 400.degree.
- a second metal oxide film with a thickness of 20 nm was formed on the insulating layer 225 .
- the insulating layer 211, the insulating layer 225, and part of the second metal oxide film were etched to form an opening reaching the conductive layer 221.
- a molybdenum film with a thickness of about 50 nm, an aluminum film with a thickness of about 200 nm, and a titanium film with a thickness of about 50 nm were formed in this order by a sputtering method so as to cover the opening.
- the second metal oxide film, the molybdenum film, the aluminum film, and the titanium film were processed to obtain a conductive layer 223 functioning as a first gate electrode (top gate electrode).
- addition treatment of boron as an impurity element was performed.
- a plasma ion doping method was used for the addition treatment.
- B 2 H 6 gas was used as the gas for supplying boron.
- a low-resistance region 231n was formed in a region of the semiconductor layer 231 that does not overlap with the conductive layer 223 .
- a silicon oxynitride film with a thickness of about 300 nm was formed by plasma CVD.
- portions of the insulating layer 218 and the insulating layer 225 were removed by etching to form an opening reaching the low resistance region 231n.
- a titanium film with a thickness of about 50 nm, an aluminum film with a thickness of about 300 nm, and a titanium film with a thickness of about 50 nm were formed in this order by a sputtering method so as to cover the opening.
- each conductive film was processed to obtain a conductive layer 222a and a conductive layer 222b functioning as a source and a drain.
- the Id-Vg characteristics of the transistor were measured.
- the Id-Vg measurement was performed by applying a voltage applied to the gate electrode (hereinafter also referred to as a gate voltage (Vg)) from ⁇ 15 V to +2 V in increments of 0.1 V.
- the voltage applied to the source (hereinafter also referred to as source voltage (Vs)) was set to 0 V (comm), and the voltage applied to the drain (hereinafter also referred to as drain voltage (Vd)) was set to 10 V.
- the drain current (Id) was measured at 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 A as the upper limit.
- the Id-Vg characteristics were measured when the same gate voltage was applied to the second gate electrode and the first gate electrode.
- the substrate on which the transistor is formed is kept at 70° C., and a voltage of 0 V is applied to the source and drain of the transistor, and a voltage of ⁇ 20 V is applied to the gate in a state of being irradiated with white LED light of 5000 lx. was held for 2 hours.
- White LED light was applied from the glass substrate side.
- the Id-Vg characteristics were measured. Since the above description can be referred to for the measurement of the Id-Vg characteristics, detailed description thereof is omitted.
- FIG. 55 shows the amount of change in the threshold voltage of the transistor due to the NBTIS test.
- the horizontal axis represents the substrate temperature during the deposition of the insulating layer 225
- the vertical axis represents the amount of change in the threshold voltage ( ⁇ Vth).
- the amount of change in threshold voltage ( ⁇ Vth) indicates the difference between the threshold voltage after stress application and the threshold voltage before the NBTIS test. As shown in FIG. 55, no significant difference was found in the amount of change in threshold voltage between the samples.
- the Id-Vg characteristics of the transistor were measured. Since the above description can be referred to for the measurement of the Id-Vg characteristics, detailed description thereof is omitted.
- the substrate on which the transistor is formed was held at 150° C., and a voltage of 0 V was applied to the source and drain of the transistor, and a voltage of ⁇ 20 V was applied to the gate while the substrate was irradiated with white LED light of 20000 lx. White LED light was applied from the glass substrate side.
- the Id-Vg characteristics were measured. Since the above description can be referred to for the measurement of the Id-Vg characteristics, detailed description thereof is omitted.
- FIG. 56A The Id-Vg characteristics of sample A are shown in FIG. 56A.
- the horizontal axis indicates the gate voltage (Vg) and the vertical axis indicates the drain current (Id).
- FIG. 56A overlays the repeated Id-Vg characteristics.
- FIG. 56B shows the amount of change in the threshold voltage of the transistor in the NBTIS test of sample A.
- the horizontal axis indicates the cumulative stress application time (Time)
- the vertical axis indicates the variation amount ( ⁇ Vth) of the threshold voltage.
- FIG. 56C The Id-Vg characteristics of sample B are shown in FIG. 56C.
- the horizontal axis indicates the gate voltage (Vg) and the vertical axis indicates the drain current (Id).
- FIG. 56C overlays the repeated Id-Vg characteristics.
- FIG. 56D shows the amount of change in the threshold voltage of the transistor in the NBTIS test of Sample B.
- the horizontal axis indicates the cumulative stress application time (Time), and the vertical axis indicates the variation amount ( ⁇ Vth) of the threshold voltage.
- sample B in which the substrate temperature during deposition of the insulating layer 225 is 400° C. is higher than sample A in which the substrate temperature during deposition of the insulating layer 225 is 300° C. It was confirmed that the variation of the threshold voltage was large.
- the indium concentrations of sample A and sample B are shown in FIG. 57A.
- the gallium concentrations of Sample A and Sample B are shown in FIG. 57B.
- the zinc concentrations of Sample A and Sample B are shown in Figure 57C.
- 57A to 57C the horizontal axis indicates the depth from the surface of the insulating layer 225 (Depth), and the vertical axis indicates the indium concentration, the gallium concentration (Ga concentration), and the zinc concentration (Zn concentration). .
- both the sample A (300° C.) and the sample B (400° C.) have a low gallium concentration and a low zinc concentration in the insulating layer 225 . It is presumed that indium diffusing from the semiconductor layer 231 into the insulating layer 225 increases when the substrate temperature during the formation of the insulating layer 225 is high.
- the defect level of the gate insulating layer was calculated.
- the NBOHC model used for the calculation is shown in FIG. 58A
- the In Si model is shown in FIG. 58C.
- the model shown in Figures 58A and 58C was based on 60 atoms (20 silicon atoms, 40 oxygen atoms) of amorphous SiO2 .
- a hybrid density functional theory (hybrid-DFT) method was used for the calculation.
- the hybrid-DFT method can obtain bandgap values closer to actual measurements than generalized gradient approximation (GGA).
- FIG. 58B A density of states diagram obtained with the model of NBOHC shown in FIG. 58A is shown in FIG. 58B.
- FIG. 58D shows the density of states diagram obtained with the In 3 Si model shown in FIG. 58C.
- the horizontal axis indicates energy and the vertical axis indicates density of states (DOS). Note that in FIGS. 58B and 58D, the valence band maximum (VBM) was adjusted to 0 eV.
- the defect level near the VBM (level 2a in FIG. 58D) and the defect level in the deep position (states due to O near In) in FIG. ) was confirmed to exist. It has been suggested that the defect level may become a level that traps holes. Note that the defect level (level 2c in FIG. 58D) near the conduction band minimum (CBM) is estimated to be an empty level in a steady state, and can be a level that traps electrons. gender can be considered.
- Fig. 59A shows the measured values of sample A (300°C) and the exponential function obtained by fitting.
- the horizontal axis indicates the accumulated stress application time (Time), and the vertical axis indicates the absolute value of the threshold voltage variation (
- actual measurements are plotted, and the function obtained by fitting is indicated by a solid line.
- Sample A (300° C.) almost matched the measured value with one exponential function (Function 1). That is, in sample A (300° C.), it was confirmed that there was one hole trapping process involved in NBTIS deterioration.
- Fig. 59B shows the measured values of sample B (400°C) and the exponential function obtained by fitting.
- the horizontal axis indicates the accumulated stress application time (Time), and the vertical axis indicates the absolute value of the threshold voltage variation (
- actual measurements are plotted, and functions obtained by fitting are indicated by solid lines, dashed lines, and dashed-dotted lines.
- one exponential function (Function1 and Function2) did not match the measured value, and the sum of two exponential functions (Function1+2) almost matched the measured value. That is, in sample B (400° C.), it was confirmed that there are two processes of hole trapping involved in NBTIS deterioration.
- FIGS. 59A and 59B the time on the horizontal axis is shown linearly.
- Graphs in which time on the horizontal axis is logarithmic are shown in FIGS. 59C and 59D.
- FIGS. 59C and 59D even in the early stage of the NBTIS test, the measured values and the function obtained by fitting are almost the same.
- Table 1 shows the saturation fluctuation amounts (A 1 and A 2 ) of the threshold voltage and the time constants ( ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 ) obtained by fitting.
- the smaller time constant is denoted as " ⁇ 1 "
- the exponential function corresponding to the time constant ⁇ 1 is denoted as "Function 1”
- the larger time constant is denoted as An exponential function corresponding to “ ⁇ 2 ” and time constant ⁇ 2 is denoted as “Function2”.
- the time constant and saturation variation obtained with sample A (300°C) are comparable to the small time constant ⁇ 1 and saturation variation A1 obtained with sample B (400°C), and these are the same deterioration factors. is presumed to be Degradation with a large time constant can be called “slow degradation”, and degradation with a small time constant can be called “fast degradation”.
- sample B 400° C.
- sample A 300° C.
- sample B 400° C.
- the insulating layer 225 functioning as a gate insulating layer has a plurality of defect levels that serve as hole traps, holes are generated from dDOS caused by oxygen vacancies (V 0 ) in the metal oxide of the semiconductor layer 231, and then into each defect. It is speculated that the levels are trapped in parallel (see FIG. 4B).
- Example 1 In this example, a display device which is one embodiment of the present invention was manufactured and its cross-sectional shape was observed.
- the description of the transistor 205R, the light-emitting device 130R, and the like shown in FIG. 9B can be referred to.
- an insulating layer 239 shown in FIG. 14 and the like was provided on the insulating layer 235 .
- the descriptions of FIGS. 21A to 22C and FIGS. 23A to 38 can be referred to.
- the transistor 205R was formed.
- the conductive layer 221 a structure in which a copper film with a thickness of about 30 nm and a tungsten film with a thickness of about 300 nm were stacked in this order was used.
- the insulating layer 211 a structure in which a first silicon nitride film with a thickness of about 50 nm, a silicon nitride film with a thickness of about 230 nm, and a silicon oxynitride film with a thickness of about 100 nm are stacked in this order was used.
- a metal oxide film with a thickness of about 20 nm was used as the semiconductor layer 231 .
- a silicon oxynitride film with a thickness of about 150 nm was used as the insulating layer 225 .
- a silicon nitride oxide film with a thickness of about 300 nm was used as the insulating layer 218 .
- a structure in which a titanium film with a thickness of about 100 nm, an aluminum film with a thickness of about 400 nm, and a titanium film with a thickness of about 100 nm were stacked in this order was used.
- an insulating layer 214 was formed so as to cover the insulating layer 218, the conductive layers 222a, and the conductive layers 222b.
- the insulating layer 214 has a structure in which a silicon oxynitride film with a thickness of about 200 nm and an acrylic film with a thickness of about 2.0 ⁇ m are laminated in this order, and an opening 191R reaching the conductive layer 222b is provided.
- a conductive layer 233R was formed to cover the opening 191R.
- an insulating layer 235 was formed to cover the insulating layer 214 and the conductive layer 233R.
- the insulating layer 235 used an acrylic film having a thickness of about 2.0 ⁇ m, and was provided with an opening 193R reaching the conductive layer 233R.
- the insulating layer 239 has a structure in which a silicon nitride film with a thickness of about 10 nm and a silicon oxynitride film with a thickness of about 200 nm are laminated in this order, and an opening is provided in a region overlapping with the opening 193R.
- a conductive layer 112R was formed to cover the insulating layer 239 and the opening 193R.
- An ITSO film with a thickness of about 50 nm was used as the conductive layer 112R.
- a layer 128 was formed so as to fill the concave portion of the conductive layer 112R.
- a polyimide film was used as the layer 128 .
- a conductive layer 126R was formed to cover the conductive layer 112R and the layer 128.
- a conductive layer 129R was formed to cover the conductive layer 126R.
- a pixel electrode 111R having a conductive layer 112R, a conductive layer 126R, and a conductive layer 129R was formed.
- An ITSO film with a thickness of about 50 nm was used as the conductive layer 129R.
- a film 113Rf to be the layer 113R was formed so as to cover the pixel electrode 111R and the insulating layer 239.
- Layer 113R includes a light-emitting layer.
- a mask film 118Rf and a mask film 119Rf were formed.
- An aluminum oxide film with a thickness of 30 nm was used as the mask film 118Rf.
- An In--Ga--Zn oxide film with a thickness of 50 nm was used as the mask film 119Rf.
- a resist mask 190a was formed on the mask film 119Rf, and the mask film 119Rf was processed using the resist mask 190a as a mask to form the mask layer 119R.
- the mask film 118Rf and the film 113Rf were processed to form the mask layer 118R and the layer 113R.
- an insulating film 125f was formed.
- An aluminum oxide film with a thickness of 15 nm was used as the insulating film 125f.
- an insulating layer 127 was formed so as to fill the concave portion of the insulating film 125f.
- a positive resist film was used as the insulating layer 127 .
- the insulating layer 127 as a mask, the insulating film 125f, the mask layer 119R, and the mask layer 118R were partly removed to expose the layer 113R.
- a common layer 114, a common electrode 115 and a protective layer 131 were formed so as to cover the layer 113R and the insulating layer 127.
- An electron injection layer was used as the common layer 114 .
- a co-deposited film of silver and magnesium was used as a common electrode.
- An In—Ga—Zn oxide film was used as the protective layer 131 .
- FIG. 60 is a transmitted electron (TE) image at a magnification of 20,000. As shown in FIG. 60, it was confirmed that the shape of the surface on which the conductive layer 112R was formed was gentle. The width 191d of the opening 191 was 3.15 ⁇ m, and the width 193d of the opening 193 was 2.54 ⁇ m. Since the same material is used for the insulating layers 214 and 235, the boundary between the insulating layers 214 and 235 is unclear in FIG.
- 11B subpixel, 11G: subpixel, 11R: subpixel, 11S: subpixel, 100G: display device, 100H: display device, 100J: display device, 100: display device, 101: layer, 110a: subpixel, 110b : sub-pixel, 110c: sub-pixel, 110d: sub-pixel, 110e: sub-pixel, 110: pixel, 111B: pixel electrode, 111G: pixel electrode, 111R: pixel electrode, 111S: pixel electrode, 111: pixel electrode, 112B: Conductive layer 112f: Conductive film 112G: Conductive layer 112p: Conductive layer 112R: Conductive layer 113_1: First region 113_2: Second region 113B: Layer 113Bf: Film 113G: Layer 113Gf : film, 113R: layer, 113Rf: film, 113S: layer, 113W: layer, 113: layer, 114: common layer, 115: common electrode, 117: light shielding layer, 118
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Geometry (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
- Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
Abstract
Description
図2は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図3Aは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。図3B及び図3Cは開口の一例を示す上面図である。
図4A及び図4Bは、バンドダイヤグラムを示す図である。
図5Aは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。図5Bは発光デバイスの一例を示す上面図である。
図6A及び図6Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図7A及び図7Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図8A及び図8Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図9A及び図9Bは表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図10A及び図10Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図11A及び図11Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図12A及び図12Bは、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図13は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図14は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図15は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図16は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図17は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図18は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図19は、表示装置の一例を示す上面図である。
図20は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図21A乃至図21Dは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図22A乃至図22Cは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図23A及び図23Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図24A及び図24Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図25A及び図25Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図26A及び図26Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図27A及び図27Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図28は、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図29A及び図29Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図30A及び図30Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図31A及び図31Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図32A及び図32Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図33A及び図33Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図34A及び図34Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図35A及び図35Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図36は、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図37A及び図37Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図38は、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図39A及び図39Bは、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図40は、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図41は、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図42は、表示装置の作製方法の一例を示す断面図である。
図43A乃至図43Gは、画素の一例を示す図である。
図44A乃至図44Kは、画素の一例を示す図である。
図45は、表示装置の一例を示す斜視図である。
図46は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図47は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図48は、表示装置の一例を示す断面図である。
図49A乃至図49Fは、発光デバイスの構成例を示す図である。
図50A乃至図50Cは、発光デバイスの構成例を示す図である。
図51A及び図51Bは、受光デバイスの構成例を示す図である。図51C乃至図51Eは、表示装置の構成例を示す図である。
図52A乃至図52Dは、電子機器の一例を示す図である。
図53A乃至図53Fは、電子機器の一例を示す図である。
図54A乃至図54Gは、電子機器の一例を示す図である。
図55は、NBTIS試験によるトランジスタの電気特性の変動量を示す図である。
図56A及び図56Cは、トランジスタのId−Vg特性を示す図である。図56B及び図56Dは、NBTIS試験によるトランジスタの電気特性の変動量を示す図である。
図57A乃至図57Cは、絶縁層中の金属濃度を示す図である。
図58A及び図58Cは、計算モデルを示す図である。図58B及び図58Dは、計算により得られた状態密度図である。
図59A乃至図59Dは、NBTIS試験によるトランジスタの電気特性の変動量を示す図である。
図60は、実施例に係る試料の断面STEM像である。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置について、図1乃至図20を用いて説明する。
図1における一点鎖線X1−X2間、及び一点鎖線Y1−Y2間の断面図を、図2に示す。
本発明の一態様である表示装置の断面図を、図14に示す。図14は、図1Aにおける一点鎖線X1−X2間、及び一点鎖線Y1−Y2間の断面図である。
本発明の一態様である表示装置の断面図を、図15に示す。図15は、図1Aにおける一点鎖線X1−X2間、及び一点鎖線Y1−Y2間の断面図である。
本発明の一態様である表示装置の断面図を、図17に示す。図17は、図1Aにおける一点鎖線X1−X2間、及び一点鎖線Y1−Y2間の断面図である。
本発明の一態様である表示装置の断面図を、図18に示す。図18は、図1Aにおける一点鎖線X1−X2間、及び一点鎖線Y1−Y2間の断面図である。
図19に、図1Aとは異なる表示装置100の上面図を示す。図19に示す画素110は、副画素11R、副画素11G、副画素11B、及び副画素11Sの4種類の副画素で構成される。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置の作製方法例について、図21乃至図42を用いて説明する。なお、各要素の材料及び形成方法について、先に実施の形態1で説明した部分と同様の部分については説明を省略することがある。また、発光デバイスの構成の詳細については実施の形態5で説明する。
ここでは、図16に示した表示装置の作製方法について、説明する。
図18に示した表示装置の作製方法について、説明する。なお、前述と重複する部分については説明を省略し、相違する部分について説明する。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置について図43及び図44を用いて説明する。
本実施の形態では、主に、図1とは異なる画素レイアウトについて説明する。副画素の配列に特に限定はなく、様々な方法を適用することができる。副画素の配列としては、例えば、ストライプ配列、Sストライプ配列、マトリクス配列、デルタ配列、ベイヤー配列、ペンタイル配列などが挙げられる。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置について、説明する。
図45に、表示装置100Gの斜視図を示し、図46に、表示装置100Gの断面図を示す。
図47に示す表示装置100Hは、ボトムエミッション型の表示装置である点で、表示装置100Gと主に相違する。
図48に示す表示装置100Jは、受光デバイス150を有する点で、表示装置100Gと主に相違する。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置に用いることができる発光デバイスについて説明する。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の表示装置に用いることができる受光デバイスと、受発光機能を有する表示装置と、について説明する。
図51Aに示すように、受光デバイスは、一対の電極(下部電極761及び上部電極762)の間に層765を有する。層765は、少なくとも1層の活性層を有し、さらに他の層を有してもよい。
本発明の一態様の表示装置は、表示部に、発光デバイスがマトリクス状に配置されており、当該表示部で画像を表示することができる。また、当該表示部には、受光デバイスがマトリクス状に配置されており、表示部は、画像表示機能に加えて、撮像機能及びセンシング機能の一方または双方を有する。表示部は、イメージセンサまたはタッチセンサに用いることができる。つまり、表示部で光を検出することで、画像を撮像すること、または、対象物(指、手、またはペンなど)の近接もしくは接触を検出することができる。
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の電子機器について、図52乃至図54を用いて説明する。
まず、基板151上に厚さ約100nmのタングステン膜をスパッタリング法により成膜し、これを加工して第2のゲート電極(ボトムゲート電極)として機能する導電層221を得た。基板151として、ガラス基板を用いた。
続いて、上記で作製した試料について、NBTIS試験を行った。NBTIS試験には、チャネル長が6μm、チャネル幅が50μmのトランジスタを用いた。
前述のNBTIS試験よりも高温、かつ高照度の条件で、電気特性の変動を評価した。
試料A及び試料Bについて、二次イオン質量分析法(SIMS:Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry)を用いて、絶縁層225中のインジウム濃度、ガリウム濃度、及び亜鉛濃度を評価した。
第一原理計算を用いて、ゲート絶縁層の欠陥準位の計算を行った。計算に用いたNBOHCのモデルを図58Aに示し、InSiのモデルを図58Cに示す。図58A及び図58Cに示すモデルは60原子(シリコン20原子、酸素40原子)のアモルファスSiO2をベースにした。計算には、ハイブリッド密度汎関数(hybrid−DFT:hybrid density functional theory)法を用いた。hybrid−DFT法は、一般化勾配近似(GGA:Generalized Gradient Approximation)より実測値に近いバンドギャップの値を得ることができる。
図56B及び図56Dに示したしきい値電圧の変動量の時間依存性に対するフィッティングを行い、NBTIS試験における劣化要因を解析した。フィッティングは、下記に示す指数関数を用いた。
まず、トランジスタ205Rを形成した。導電層221として、厚さ約30nmの銅膜と、厚さ約300nmのタングステン膜とをこの順に積層した構造を用いた。絶縁層211として、厚さ約50nmの第1の窒化シリコン膜と、厚さ約230nmの窒化シリコン膜と、厚さ約100nmの酸化窒化シリコン膜とをこの順に積層した構造を用いた。半導体層231として、厚さ約20nmの金属酸化物膜を用いた。絶縁層225として、厚さ約150nmの酸化窒化シリコン膜を用いた。導電層223として、厚さ約50nmのモリブデン膜と、厚さ約200nmのアルミニウム膜と、厚さ約50nmのチタン膜とをこの順に積層した構造を用いた。絶縁層218として、厚さ約300nmの窒化酸化シリコン膜を用いた。導電層222a及び導電層222bとして、厚さ約100nmのチタン膜と、厚さ約400nmのアルミニウム膜と、厚さ約100nmのチタン膜とをこの順に積層した構造を用いた。
続いて、試料を集束イオンビーム(FIB:Focused Ion Beam)により薄片化し、走査透過電子顕微鏡(STEM:Scanning Transmission Electron Microscopy)を用いて断面観察を行った。
Claims (12)
- トランジスタと、発光デバイスと、第1の絶縁層と、第2の絶縁層と、第1の導電層と、を有し、
前記トランジスタは、半導体層と、前記半導体層と電気的に接続される第2の導電層と、を有し、
前記発光デバイスは、画素電極を有し、
前記第1の絶縁層は、前記トランジスタ上に設けられ、
前記第1の絶縁層は、前記第2の導電層に達する第1の開口を有し、
前記第1の導電層は、前記第1の開口を覆い
前記第2の絶縁層は、前記第1の絶縁層上に設けられ、
前記第2の絶縁層は、前記第1の開口と重なる領域に第2の開口を有し、
前記画素電極は、前記第2の絶縁層の上面及び前記第2の開口を覆い、
前記画素電極は、前記第1の導電層を介して前記第2の導電層と電気的に接続され、
前記第1の絶縁層の端部は、前記第2の導電層上に位置し、
前記第2の絶縁層の端部は、前記第1の導電層上に位置し、
前記第2の絶縁層の端部は、前記第1の絶縁層の端部より外側に位置する表示装置。 - 請求項1において、
前記第1の絶縁層及び前記第2の絶縁層はそれぞれ、有機材料を有する表示装置。 - 請求項1において、
層を有し、
前記画素電極は、第3の導電層と、前記第3の導電層上の第4の導電層と、と有し、
前記第3の導電層は、前記第2の絶縁層の上面及び前記第2の開口を覆い、
前記第3の導電層は、前記第2の絶縁層の側面及び前記第2の導電層の上面の形状に沿った凹部を有し、
前記層は、前記凹部を埋め込まれるように設けられ、
前記第4の導電層は、前記第3の導電層の上面及び前記層の上面を覆い、
前記第4の導電層は、可視光に対して反射性を有する材料を含む表示装置。 - 請求項2において、
層を有し、
前記画素電極は、第3の導電層と、前記第3の導電層上の第4の導電層と、と有し、
前記第3の導電層は、前記第2の絶縁層の上面及び前記第2の開口を覆い、
前記第3の導電層は、前記第2の絶縁層の側面及び前記第2の導電層の上面の形状に沿った凹部を有し、
前記層は、前記凹部を埋め込まれるように設けられ、
前記第4の導電層は、前記第3の導電層の上面及び前記層の上面を覆い、
前記第4の導電層は、可視光に対して反射性を有する材料を含む表示装置。 - 請求項3または請求項4において、
前記層は、絶縁層である表示装置。 - 請求項3または請求項4において、
前記層は、導電層である表示装置。 - 請求項1乃至請求項4のいずれか一において、
第3の絶縁層を有し、
前記第3の絶縁層は、前記第2の絶縁層の上面に接して設けられ、
前記第3の絶縁層は、無機材料を有し、
前記画素電極は、前記第3の絶縁層の上面と接する領域を有する表示装置。 - 請求項1乃至請求項4のいずれか一において、
第4の絶縁層を有し、
前記第4の絶縁層は、前記第1の絶縁層の上面に接して設けられ、
前記第4の絶縁層は、無機材料を有し、
前記第1の導電層は、前記第4の絶縁層の上面と接する領域を有する表示装置。 - 請求項1乃至請求項4のいずれか一において、
第5の絶縁層と、第6の絶縁層と、を有し、
前記発光デバイスは、前記画素電極と、共通電極と、前記画素電極と前記共通電極に挟持されるEL層と、を有し、
前記第5の絶縁層は、前記EL層の上面の一部及び側面を覆い、
前記第6の絶縁層は、前記第5の絶縁層を介して、前記EL層の上面の一部及び側面を覆い、
前記共通電極は、前記第6の絶縁層を覆う表示装置。 - 請求項9において、
前記第5の絶縁層は、無機材料を有し、
前記第6の絶縁層は、有機材料を有する表示装置。 - 請求項1乃至請求項4のいずれか一において、
第5の絶縁層を有し、
前記発光デバイスは、前記画素電極と、共通電極と、前記画素電極と前記共通電極に挟持されるEL層と、を有し、
前記第5の絶縁層は、前記画素電極の上面の一部及び側面を覆い、
前記EL層は、前記第5の絶縁層の上面と接する領域を有し、
前記共通電極は、前記第5の絶縁層を覆う表示装置。 - 請求項1乃至請求項4のいずれか一において、
前記トランジスタは、前記半導体層とゲート電極とに挟持されるゲート絶縁層を有し、
前記半導体層は、金属酸化物を有し、
前記ゲート絶縁層中の前記金属酸化物が有する金属元素の濃度は、2×1019atoms/cm3以下である表示装置。
Priority Applications (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| KR1020247020361A KR20240110842A (ko) | 2021-11-30 | 2022-11-17 | 표시 장치 |
| JP2023564268A JPWO2023100014A1 (ja) | 2021-11-30 | 2022-11-17 | |
| US18/707,700 US20250008780A1 (en) | 2021-11-30 | 2022-11-17 | Display apparatus |
| CN202280075633.1A CN118235191A (zh) | 2021-11-30 | 2022-11-17 | 显示装置 |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2021194831 | 2021-11-30 | ||
| JP2021-194831 | 2021-11-30 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2023100014A1 true WO2023100014A1 (ja) | 2023-06-08 |
Family
ID=86611602
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/IB2022/061057 Ceased WO2023100014A1 (ja) | 2021-11-30 | 2022-11-17 | 表示装置 |
Country Status (5)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (1) | US20250008780A1 (ja) |
| JP (1) | JPWO2023100014A1 (ja) |
| KR (1) | KR20240110842A (ja) |
| CN (1) | CN118235191A (ja) |
| WO (1) | WO2023100014A1 (ja) |
Citations (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2001312223A (ja) * | 2000-02-22 | 2001-11-09 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | 自発光装置及びその作製方法 |
| JP2003091246A (ja) * | 2001-09-18 | 2003-03-28 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | 有機エレクトロルミネセンスディスプレイパネルおよびその製造方法 |
| JP2004046110A (ja) * | 2002-05-13 | 2004-02-12 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | 表示装置 |
| JP2011085918A (ja) * | 2009-09-16 | 2011-04-28 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | 半導体表示装置 |
| US20200365677A1 (en) * | 2019-05-17 | 2020-11-19 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device |
| US20210066639A1 (en) * | 2019-09-04 | 2021-03-04 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd | Display device |
Family Cites Families (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| KR20190076045A (ko) | 2016-11-10 | 2019-07-01 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | 표시 장치 및 표시 장치의 구동 방법 |
-
2022
- 2022-11-17 WO PCT/IB2022/061057 patent/WO2023100014A1/ja not_active Ceased
- 2022-11-17 CN CN202280075633.1A patent/CN118235191A/zh active Pending
- 2022-11-17 JP JP2023564268A patent/JPWO2023100014A1/ja active Pending
- 2022-11-17 KR KR1020247020361A patent/KR20240110842A/ko active Pending
- 2022-11-17 US US18/707,700 patent/US20250008780A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2001312223A (ja) * | 2000-02-22 | 2001-11-09 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | 自発光装置及びその作製方法 |
| JP2003091246A (ja) * | 2001-09-18 | 2003-03-28 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | 有機エレクトロルミネセンスディスプレイパネルおよびその製造方法 |
| JP2004046110A (ja) * | 2002-05-13 | 2004-02-12 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | 表示装置 |
| JP2011085918A (ja) * | 2009-09-16 | 2011-04-28 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | 半導体表示装置 |
| US20200365677A1 (en) * | 2019-05-17 | 2020-11-19 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Display device |
| US20210066639A1 (en) * | 2019-09-04 | 2021-03-04 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd | Display device |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| JPWO2023100014A1 (ja) | 2023-06-08 |
| KR20240110842A (ko) | 2024-07-16 |
| US20250008780A1 (en) | 2025-01-02 |
| CN118235191A (zh) | 2024-06-21 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20230116067A1 (en) | Display apparatus, display module, and electronic device | |
| WO2023094943A1 (ja) | 表示装置、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
| US20240381704A1 (en) | Display apparatus, display module, electronic device, and method for fabricating display apparatus | |
| US20240224734A1 (en) | Display apparatus, display module, electronic device, and method for fabricating display apparatus | |
| US20240334791A1 (en) | Display Apparatus And Electronic Device | |
| US20240324309A1 (en) | Display apparatus and method for manufacturing display apparatus | |
| WO2023156876A1 (ja) | 半導体装置、及び半導体装置の作製方法 | |
| WO2023047235A1 (ja) | 表示装置の作製方法 | |
| US20240389393A1 (en) | Display device, display module, electronic device, and method for manufacturing display device | |
| US20250098439A1 (en) | Display apparatus | |
| US20240407222A1 (en) | Display device, display module, and electronic device | |
| US20250098409A1 (en) | Manufacturing method of display device, display device, display module, and electronic device | |
| WO2023144643A1 (ja) | 表示装置、及び表示装置の作製方法 | |
| WO2023021360A1 (ja) | 表示装置、及び電子機器 | |
| WO2023285906A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、電子機器、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
| WO2023275654A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、及び電子機器 | |
| US20240268152A1 (en) | Display device, display module, electronic device, and method for manufacturing display device | |
| US20240431191A1 (en) | Method for manufacturing display device | |
| US20250081748A1 (en) | Display Device | |
| US20250008780A1 (en) | Display apparatus | |
| US20250113706A1 (en) | Display device and method for manufacturing display device | |
| US20240341155A1 (en) | Display device, display module, electronic device, and method for manufacturing display device | |
| WO2023111754A1 (ja) | 表示装置、及び、表示装置の作製方法 | |
| WO2023073489A1 (ja) | 表示装置、表示モジュール、及び、電子機器 | |
| WO2025141444A1 (ja) | 表示装置 |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 22900750 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 18707700 Country of ref document: US |
|
| WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 202280075633.1 Country of ref document: CN |
|
| ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2023564268 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
| ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20247020361 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 22900750 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |

